Mathematics - Evesham Township Schools

Transcription

Mathematics - Evesham Township Schools
EVESHAM TOWNSHIP
SCHOOL DISTRICT
MATHEMATICS CURRICULUM
GRADES K-8
ADOPTED: August 22, 2013
EVESHAM TOWNSHIP SCHOOL DISTRICT
MISSION STATEMENT
The mission of the Evesham Township School District is to promote excellence in an
environment that engages students in meaningful learning experiences. In partnership
with students, dedicated staff, families, and community, the district provides a strong
educational foundation that will empower our students to:






Achieve their unique potential
Embrace self-directed, life-long learning
Develop the skills necessary for appropriate risk-taking and responsible decisionmaking
Respect themselves and others
Problem-solve individually and collaboratively
Become contributing members of a diverse, global society
John Scavelli, Jr., Superintendent
Danielle T. Magulick, Director of Curriculum & Instruction
Jennifer Bland, Supervisor, Grades 2-8
Maria Sobel, Supervisor, Grades K-1
Making the world a better place,
one student at a time
1
Table of Contents
Vision for Mathematics Education ...........................................................................3
Goals for Students
Goals for Teachers
Program Description................................................................................................7
New Jersey Core Curriculum Content Standards....................................................10
Standards and Expectations, Grades K-8 ...............................................................15
Kindergarten .................................................................................................16
Grade 1 ........................................................................................................22
Grade 2 ........................................................................................................28
Grade 3 ........................................................................................................34
Grade 4 ........................................................................................................44
Grade 5 ........................................................................................................53
Grade 6 ........................................................................................................62
Grade 7 ........................................................................................................73
Grade 8 ........................................................................................................82
Balanced Math Program Overview..........................................................................90
Pacing Guides and Overview of Mathematics Chapters ........................................92
Math Pacing Guide: Grades K-2..................................................................93
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades K-2.........................................94
Math Pacing Guide: Grades 3-5 ..................................................................152
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades 3-5 .........................................153
Math Pacing Guide: Grades 6-8 ..................................................................212
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades 6-8 .........................................213
Appendices .............................................................................................................249
Appendix A: Technology Integration.......................................................................250
Appendix B: 21st Century Life and Careers Standards and Expectations for
Integration ....................................................................................................261
Appendix C: Literature Connections.......................................................................276
Appendix D: Flexible Grouping...............................................................................284
Appendix E: Resource Articles...............................................................................290
2
VISION FOR MATHEMATICS EDUCATION
3
“No problem can be solved by the same consciousness that created
it. We must see the world anew.”
Albert Einstein
The Evesham Township Schools Mathematics Curriculum is designed to prepare
students to develop mathematical literacy in order to be equipped with the knowledge
and decision making skills necessary to assume their role as active and deliberate
citizens.
A mathematically literate individual is one who is able to “explore, conjecture, and to
reason logically as well as use a variety of mathematic methods effectively to solve
problems.” Students who are mathematically literate must be able to communicate
effectively using the language of mathematics as they speak, read, and write
mathematics as well as listen to mathematics (p. 20, 2008; Mathematical Literacy,
Thompson, Kersaint, Richards, Hunsader, Rubenstein).
Although much has changed about the nature of mathematics students’ needs and the
depth of mathematical thinking required to be successful in a 21st century society, the
fundamentals of a balanced mathematics program remain the same. A balanced
mathematics program must encompass conceptual understanding (making sense of
math), proficiency with mathematical skills, facts, and procedures (doing math), and
problem solving (using math). A focus on any one of these areas in isolation will result
in inadequate understanding and mathematic proficiency that is superficial and shortlived. By focusing on all three aspects, a balance of conceptual understanding and
procedural fluency is developed within a problem solving framework that allows
students to apply mathematical concepts beyond the classroom. In addition to these
critical components, the connective tissue of a coherent mathematics program mirrors
the same critical abilities required in the twenty-first century: mathematical habits of
mind, flexible thinking skills, and strong quantitative reasoning (Seeley, 2009).
“Knowing what works is good, but even better is knowing why it works (Hyde, p.13).”
Mathematics is the science of patterns and just like reading, math is more than a
collection of skills or subskills. Computational proficiency and math facts are part of
mathematics, but they do not define it. The goal of mathematics teaching is
understanding concepts, not merely memorizing facts and procedures. Therefore, we
must use what we know about cognition to build this understanding. It is vital to take
advantage of children’s natural curiosity and schema for mathematics beginning at an
early age. These natural building blocks, or habits of mind, coupled with mathematical
logic must be developed to facilitate children’s ability to become competent at
mathematics. A focus on habits of mind must take precedence over arbitrary rules,
formulas, and procedures that do not derive from logic.
To achieve our mission for student learning, our mathematics curriculum actively
engages students in meaningful problem solving experiences that are aligned with the
Common Core Standards for Mathematics, as well as the Standards for Learning
established by the National Council for Teachers of Mathematics (NCTM). Topics
within these standards have been prioritized to allow for greater depth of study and
mastery of concepts. As we prepare our students to be successful 21st century
learners, it is essential for them to be literate in mathematical comprehension and
skilled in mathematics. According to the National Council for Teachers of Mathematics
4
(NCTM), “learning mathematics is enhanced when content is placed in context and is
connected to other subject areas and when students are given multiple opportunities to
apply mathematics in meaningful ways as part of the learning process.”
Comprehension is the vehicle to conceptual understanding and successful learning of
mathematics. Students gain conceptual understanding through the use of strategies,
which include making connections, questioning, visualizing, inferring, predicting and
synthesizing. To this end, we embrace a workshop approach to teach mathematics and
to structure lessons. The components of a mathematics workshop include mini-lessons
or other whole group lessons, exploration time, guided small-group support or strategy
lessons, independent work, conferring, opportunities for collaboration, and reflection.
A comprehensive mathematics program must enable all students to consolidate their
mathematical thinking through communication and communicate their mathematical
thinking coherently to peers, teachers, and others. Effective communication and
meaningful discussions among students include justifying responses, encouraging
alternate solutions, and providing constructive feedback ultimately increase student
understanding. Students working in various grouping structures have the chance to
focus on their reasoning and actively defend or validate their thinking, not simply
answer. Misconceptions or gaps are identified when a student explains a solution, even
when it is correct.
Technology is an essential tool for learning mathematics in the 21st century, and all
schools must ensure that all their students have access to technology. Effective
teachers maximize the potential of technology to develop students’ understanding,
stimulate their interest, and increase their proficiency in mathematics. When
technology is used strategically, it can provide access to mathematics for all
students.
-A Position of the National Council of Teachers of Mathematics on Technology
(March 2008)
The use of technology and tools in the mathematics classroom allows students to move
from skills in isolation to exploration and discovery. Research suggests that the
strategic use of technology and mathematical tools not only makes mathematics more
engaging and fun, but also facilitates the students’ ability to engage in real life
applications of mathematics and prepares students for the demands of this century.
Mathematically literate students are able to make sound decisions about when to use
technological tools to pose or solve problems and to explore and deepen their
understanding of concepts.
5
Goals
In order to achieve the district vision for Mathematics instruction, students will need to
work towards fulfilling the following goals:

Develop mathematical process skills to promote mathematical discourse and
enhance understanding and facilitate application of mathematical content in
everyday situations.

Develop a strong sense of number and its application in real world settings.

Explore, develop, understand, and apply fundamentals of spatial sense and
reasoning and related measurements in everyday context.

Read, understand, construct, analyze and explain representation of data and
probability statistics collected from real experiments or everyday phenomena.

Use concepts of algebraic reasoning to identify patterns, solve problems and
equations, and connect algebra to real life experiences.

Make sound decisions about when to use technology and mathematical tools to
pose or solve problems.

Develop an understanding and apply the standards for mathematical practices.
6
Program Description
The mathematics curriculum incorporates developmentally appropriate, inquiry based
instruction. Students explore the content areas of number and operations,
measurement, geometry, algebra, data analysis and probability. Content is presented
in various contexts to promote development of mathematical habits of mind including
problem solving, making connections, communication, utilizing multiple representations,
and integrating technology. Hands-on activities and use of manipulatives are essential
for developing students’ concrete understanding before progressing to more symbolic
and abstract representations of math.
Elementary
In the elementary grades (K-5) students explore concepts in a coherent and focused
sequence with an emphasis on Number and Operations, as well as Geometry and
Measurement. Fewer topics are studied in greater depth in an effort to achieve
mastery. Students receive multiple exposures or repeated practice over time, which is
proven to deepen mathematical understanding as topics become more complex when
revisited in subsequent grades. Curricular materials emphasize concept mastery, the
use of manipulatives to support a concrete-pictorial-abstract approach, metacognitive
reasoning, and the ability to communicate and collaborate with others. Teachers
consider individual learning styles, preferences, and readiness when facilitating problem
solving experiences in real-life contexts and developing meaningful activities. Although
Math in Focus is the primary resource for instruction, other resources are also integral
parts of the mathematics curriculum. These additional resources include, but are not
limited to: Math Windows, Discrete Math Resource, Open Response Resource, and
Constructivist Math Chapters.
Middle
In the middle school grades (6-8), students continue to explore concepts in a coherent
and focused sequence with a more sophisticated understanding of Number and
Operations, as well as an emphasis on Algebra, Data, and Statistics. Fewer topics are
studied in greater depth in an effort to achieve mastery. Once a topic has been
introduced, the students continue to explore content embedded in real world, problemsolving contexts. Chapters of study focus on one content area (e.g., Algebra) or “big
idea” to afford students an opportunity to explore that particular area more thoroughly
before moving on. Curricular materials emphasize the use of multiple strategies and
discovery of patterns as students explore problems/investigations, develop theories,
make connections, and construct understanding of content. Students continue to use
manipulatives and technology as appropriate within a concrete-pictorial-abstract
approach and are introduced to the graphing calculator to solve problems and represent
data. Although Math in Focus is the primary resource for instruction, other resources
are also integral parts of the mathematics curriculum. These additional resources
include, but are not limited to: Math Windows, Hands on Equations, and Constructivist
Math Chapters.
7
Differentiated Instruction
Differentiated instruction is “responsive teaching” that considers the variance in student
readiness, interests, and learning profile rather than “one-size-fits-all.” Teachers
proactively plan varied approaches to what students need to learn (content), how they
will learn it (process), and/or how they can express what they have learned (product) in
order to increase the likelihood that each student will learn as much as he or she can as
efficiently as possible. In order to meet the needs of all learners, teachers utilize flexible
grouping. The various grouping options include cooperative groups, whole class, small
group, partners, and individual instruction.
Accelerated Instruction
Beginning in grade 4, accelerated math instruction is offered for selected students. In
grades 4 and 5, enrichment is offered where students explore Math in Focus concepts
and materials at an accelerated pace. Students are recommended for these classes
based on specific criteria which reflect academic performance in classroom, district, and
state tasks, as well as a student’s interest and disposition towards mathematical tasks
and math concepts. In some instances, the needs of accelerated math students may be
addressed through homogeneous grouping within the heterogeneous class.
In the middle school, learners in level one courses in grades 6 and 7 explore Math in
Focus and supplemental materials at an accelerated pace. These students may be
introduced to additional units, investigations, problems, or projects to promote deeper
understanding of concepts. Additionally, students in accelerated classes are afforded
opportunities to participate in competitions, contests, and other extensions of the
mathematics curriculum. In grade 8, students who have demonstrated successful
performance in accelerated math courses, strong academic records, and attainment of
established benchmark scores on district and state standardized assessments may be
recommended for Algebra 1 instruction. This course is aligned with the curriculum of
Cherokee High School and utilizes its algebra text to explore the principles of algebraic
reasoning. Students who successfully complete this course may choose to accept high
school credit. These students are also currently eligible to take a test-for-credit (Option
2) at the high school to earn honors credit for the course. In addition to Algebra
instruction, a select number of accelerated students will be invited to take Cherokee
High School Geometry as an elective course in eighth grade. Invitations are awarded
based on exceptional academic and testing performance. This course also utilizes the
high school text to present content.
Modifications for Special Populations
As all students are individuals it will be necessary to differentiate instruction daily to
meet the needs of every learner. In all cases, teachers should be consistently gathering
and utilizing formative assessment data to drive instruction. At times this will
necessitate additional whole group lessons, flexible, small group instruction, individual
conferring, and tiered assignments.
Students who are at risk for failure or are English Language learners should be seen in
small groups as much as possible in order to ensure additional opportunities for
differentiation, modeling, and guided practice prior to independent practice with
concepts or skills. In addition, teachers may request observations from building
specialists (ex. reading specialists, math coaches, etc.) or curriculum supervisors
regarding feedback and/or recommendations for individuals. Teachers will utilize the
I&RS process for students who are not identified for Special Education and who are not
making sufficient progress in any subject area.
8
In certain cases, additional modifications are necessary to meet the needs of all
students. Students who are identified through the Special Education process or the Tier
III Gifted and Talented process will have additional individualized plans that may include
adjusted materials or accommodations in order to access the curriculum and meet the
standards. In these cases, teachers will consult IEPs or Tier III plans for specific
guidelines regarding instruction and materials.
Teachers with Special Education students who are not making sufficient progress shall
request an observation with the Learning Consultant and Curriculum Supervisor in order
to design individualized recommendations regarding additional instructional strategies,
specialized programs or placement recommendations.
9
NEW JERSEY
CORE CURRICULUM
CONTENT STANDARDS
Standards for Mathematical Practice, K-8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Make sense of problems and persevere in solving them.
Reason abstractly and quantitatively.
Construct viable arguments and critique the reasoning of others.
Model with mathematics.
Use appropriate tools strategically.
Attend to precision.
Look for and make use of structure.
Look for and express regularity in repeated reasoning.
Standards for Mathematical Content, by Grade Level
Domains Addressed, K-5
1. Counting and Cardinality
2. Operations and Algebraic Thinking
3. Number and Operation in Base Ten
4. Measurement and Data
5. Geometry
6. Number and Operation-Fractions (3-5)
Domains Addressed, 6-8
1. Ratios and Proportional Relationships
2. The Number System
3. Expressions and Equations
4. Geometry
5. Statistics and Probability
6. Functions (8)
The Common Core State Standards can be viewed on line:
http://www.corestandards.org/assets/CCSSI_Math%20Standards.pdf
10
Overview of K-2 Common Core Standards

Counting and Cardinality



Operations and Algebraic
Thinking
K
Know number names and
the count sequence
Count to tell the number of
objects
Compare numbers
Understand addition as

putting together and adding
to, and understand
subtraction as taking apart 
and taking from



Number and Operations in
Base Ten

Measurement and Data


Geometry

Work with numbers 11-19
to gain foundations for
place value

Describe and compare
measurable attributes
Classify objects and count
the number of objects in
categories

Identify and describe
shapes
Analyze, compare, create,
and compose shapes



11


1
Represent and solve
problems involving addition
and subtraction
Understand and apply
properties of operations and
the relationship between
addition and subtraction
Add and subtract within 20
Work with addition and
subtraction equations
Extend the counting
sequence
Understand place value
Use place value
understanding and
properties of operations to
add and subtract
Measure lengths indirectly
and by iterating length units
Tell and write time
Represent and interpret
data
Reason with shapes and
their attributes
2



Represent and solve
problems involving addition
and subtraction
Add and subtract within 20
Work with equal groups of
objects to gain foundations
for multiplication


Understand place value
Use place value
understanding and properties
of operations to add and
subtract

Measure and estimate
lengths in standards units
Relate addition and
subtraction to length
Work with time and money
Represent and interpret data
Reason with shapes and
their attributes




Overview of 3-5 Common Core Standards


Operations and Algebraic
Thinking



Number and Operations in
Base Ten

3
Represent and solve problems
involving multiplication and
division
Understand properties of
multiplication and the
relationship between
multiplication and division
Multiply and divide within 100
Solve problems involving the
four operations, and identify
and explain patterns in
arithmetic
Use place value
understanding and properties
of operations to perform multidigit arithmetic






Develop understanding of
fractions as numbers

Number and Operations –
Fractions

12
4
Use the four operations with
whole numbers to solve
problems
Gain familiarity with factors
and multiples
Generate and analyze
patterns
Generalize place value
understanding for multi-digit
whole numbers
Use place value
understanding and
properties of operations to
perform multi-digit
arithmetic
Extend understanding of
fraction equivalence and
ordering
Build fractions from unit
fractions by applying and
extending previous
understandings of
operations on whole
numbers
Understand decimal
notation for fractions, and
compare decimal fractions


5
Write and interpret
numerical expressions
Analyze patterns and
relationships

Understand the place value
system

Use equivalent fractions as
a strategy to add and
subtract fractions
Apply and extend previous
understandings of
multiplication and division to
multiply and divide fractions




Measurement and Data


3
Solve problems involving
measurement and estimation
of intervals of time, liquid
volumes, and masses of
objects
Represent and interpret data
Geometric measurement:
understand concepts of area
and relate area to
multiplication and to addition
Geometric measurement:
recognize perimeter as an
attribute of plane figures and
distinguish between linear and
area measures
Reason with shapes and their
attributes
Geometry




4
Solve problems involving

measurement and
conversion of
measurements from a larger 
unit to a smaller unit
Represent and interpret

data
Geometric measurement:
understand concepts of
angle and measure angles
5
Convert like measurement
units within a given
measurement system
Represent and interpret
data
Geometric measurement:
understand concepts of
volume and relate volume to
multiplication and to
addition

Graph points on the
coordinate plane to solve
real-world and mathematical
problems
Classify two-dimensional
figures into categories
based on their properties
Draw and identify lines and
angles, and classify shapes
by properties of their lines
and angles

13
Overview of 6-8 Common Core Standards

Ratios and Proportional
Relationships


The Number System



Expressions and
Equations

6
Understand ratio concepts and 
use reasoning to solve
problems
Apply and extend previous
understandings of
multiplication and division to
divide fractions by fractions
Compute fluently with multidigit numbers and find
common factors and multiples
Apply and extend previous
understandings of numbers to
the system of rational
numbers
Apply and extend previous
understandings of arithmetic
to algebraic expressions
Reason about and solve onevariable equations and
inequalities
Represent and analyze
quantitative relationships
between dependent and
independent variables



7
Analyze proportional
relationships and use them
to solve real-world and
mathematical problems
Apply and extend previous
understandings of
operations with fractions to
add, subtract, multiply, and
divide rational numbers

Use properties of operations 
to generate equivalent
expressions

Solve real-life and
mathematical problems
using numerical and
algebraic expressions and

equations


Functions
14
8
Know that there are
numbers that are not
rational and approximate
them by rational numbers
Work with radicals and
integer exponents
Understand the connections
between proportional
relationships, lines, and
linear equations
Analyze and solve linear
equations and pairs of
simultaneous linear
equations
Define, evaluate, and
compare functions
Use functions to model
relationships between
quantities
STANDARDS AND EXPECTATIONS,
GRADES K-8
15
Kindergarten
Standards and Expectations
COUNTING AND CARDINALITY
K
Know number names and the count sequence.
Resources
K.CC
1. Count to 100 by ones and by tens.
MiF: 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5,
4.6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 9.1, 9.2,
9.3, 9.4, 12.3, 15.2, 15.3, 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2, 18.3
K.CC
2. Count forward beginning from a given number within
the known sequence (instead of having to begin at 1).
MiF: 2.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 12.1,
14.1, 14.2
K.CC
3. Write numbers from 0 to 20. Represent a number of
objects with a written numeral 0-20 (with 0
representing a count of no objects).
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6,
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 8.1,
8.2, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 12.1, 14.4, 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2,
18.3, 19.1
K.CC
Count to tell the number of objects.
4. Understand the relationship between numbers and
quantities; connect counting to cardinality.
a. When counting objects, say the number names in
the standard order, pairing each object with one
and only one number name and each number
name with one and only one object.
b. Understand when counting objects that the last
number they say is the total number of objects, and
that the number of objects being counted remains
the same regardless of the arrangement of the
objects or the order in which they are counted.
c. Understand that the very next number in a
sequence of numbers refers to a quantity that is
one larger.
MiF: 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 4.1, 4.2,
4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4,
8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 14.4, 15.2,
15.3
MiF: 1.1,1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 4.1,
4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 8.1, 8.2,
8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 8.6, 8.7, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 14.1, 14.2, 14.4,
15.2, 15.3
MiF: 2.3, 2.4, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 4.6, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 8.4, 8.5,
8.6, 8.7, 12.1, 14.1, 14.2, 14.4, 15.2, 15.3
16
K.CC
K.CC
K.CC
COUNTING AND CARDINALITY
K
Resources
5. Count to answer “how many?” questions about as
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4,
many as 20 things arranged in a line, a rectangular
4.5, 4.6, 5.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 8.1, 8.2, 12.1, 20.2
array, or a circle, or as many as 10 things in a
scattered configuration; given a number from 1–20,
count out that many objects.
Compare numbers.
6. Identify whether the number of objects in one group is MiF: 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 6.5, 9.1, 9.3, 12.3, 14.1, 14.2, 14.4
greater than, less than, or equal to the number of
objects in another group, e.g., by using matching and
counting strategies.
7. Compare two numbers between 1 and 10 presented
MiF: 2.4, 6.5
as written numerals.
17
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
K.OA
K.OA
K.OA
K.OA
K.OA
K
Understand addition as putting together and adding
to, and understand subtraction as taking apart and
taking from.
1. Represent addition and subtraction with objects,
fingers, mental images, drawings, sounds (e.g., claps),
acting out situations, verbal explanations, expressions,
or equations.
2. Understand and solve addition and subtraction word
problems, and add and subtract within 10, e.g. by
using objects or drawings to represent the problem.
3. Deconstruct numbers less than 10 by breaking the
number into a pair of numbers in more than one way,
and representing the new way of naming the number
with an equation or drawing. For example 5 = 2 + 3.
4. For any number from 1 to 9, find the number that
makes 10 when added to the given number, e.g., by
using objects or drawings, and record the answer with
a drawing or equation.
5. Fluently add and subtract within 5.
Resources
MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 6.1, 9.1, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 14.1, 14.2,
14.3, 14.4, 15.2, 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2, 18.3, 20.2
MiF: 4.1, 9.1, 15.2, 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2, 18.3, 20.2
MiF: 12.1, 12.2, 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.2,
18.3, 20.2
MiF: 6.1, 12.1, 12.2, 14.1, 14.2
MiF: 9.1, 17.2, 18.3
18
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
K.NBT
K
Work with numbers 11–19 to gain foundations for
place value.
1. Construct and deconstruct numbers from 11 to 19 into
ten ones and some further ones, e.g., by using
objects or drawings, and record each construction or
deconstruction by a drawing or equation (e.g., 18 = 10
+ 8); and understand that these numbers are
composed of ten ones and one, two, three, four, five,
six, seven, eight, or nine ones.
19
Resources
MiF: 14.3, 14.4
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
K
Describe and compare measurable attributes.
Resources
K.MD
1. Describe measurable attributes of objects, such as
length or weight. Describe several measurable
attributes of a single object.
MiF: 1.3, 1.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1, 5.2, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3,
16.1, 16.2, 19.1, 19.2
K.MD
2. Directly compare two objects with a measurable
attribute in common, to see which object has “more
of”/“less of” the attribute, and describe the difference.
For example, directly compare the heights of two
children and describe one child as taller/shorter.
Classify objects and count the number of objects in
each category.
3. Classify objects into given categories; count the
numbers of objects in each category and sort the
categories by count.
MiF: 1.3, 1.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 5.1, 5.2, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1,
15.2, 15.3, 16.1, 16.2, 19.1, 19.2
K.MD
MiF: 3.1, 5.1, 5.2, 11.2, 16.2, 19.3
20
GEOMETRY
K.G
K
Identify and describe shapes (squares, circles,
triangles, rectangles, hexagons, cubes, cones, and
spheres/balls).
1. Describe objects in the environment using names of
shapes.
Resources
MiF: 5.3
a. Begin to describe the relative positions of these
objects using terms such as above, below, beside,
in front of, behind, and next to.
K.G
2. Correctly name shapes regardless of their orientations MiF: 7.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 13.1, 16.1, 16.2
or overall size.
K.G
3. Identify shapes as two-dimensional (lying in a plane,
“flat”) or three-dimensional (“solid”).
K.G
K.G
K.G
MiF: 7.2
Analyze, compare, create, and compose shapes.
4. Analyze and compare two- and three-dimensional
shapes, in different sizes and orientations, using
informal language to describe their similarities,
differences, parts (e.g., number of sides and
vertices/corners) and other attributes (e.g., having
sides of equal length).
5. Draw shapes and make models of them.
MiF: 7.1, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5
MiF: 7.2, 7.3
6. Compose simple shapes to form larger shapes. For
example, “Can you join these two triangles with full
sides touching to make a rectangle?”
MiF: 7.1, 7.4
21
Grade 1
Standards and Expectations
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
1.OA.
1.OA.
1
Represent and solve problems involving addition and
subtraction and explain reasoning used.
1. Use addition and subtraction within 20 to solve word
problems involving situations of adding to, taking from,
putting together, taking apart, and comparing with
unknown in all positions, e.g., by using objects,
drawings, and equations with a symbol for the
unknown number to represent the problem.
2. Solve word problems that call for addition of three
whole numbers whose sum is less than or equal to 20,
e.g., by using objects, drawings, and equations with a
symbol for the unknown number to represent the
problem.
ETSD 1. Identify penny, nickel, dime, quarter, and dollar and
know its value. Show amounts of money with fewest
amounts of coins. Make exchanges for coins.
1.OA.
Resources
MiF: 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 13.6, 14.1, 14.2
MiF: 8.3, 13.5, 13.6, 14.2
MiF: 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 19.4
Calendar
Understand and apply properties of operations and
the relationship between addition and subtraction.
3. Apply properties of operations as strategies to add and MiF:1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 3.2, 8.3, 13.5, 14.1, 14.2
subtract. Examples: If 8 + 3 = 11 is known, then 3 + 8
= 11 is also known. (Commutative property of addition)
To add 2 + 6 + 4, the second two numbers can be
added to make a ten, so 2 + 6 + 4 = 2 + 10 = 12.
(Associative property of addition)
22
1.OA.
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
1
Resources
4. Understand subtraction as an unknown-addend
MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 8.2, 8.3, 13.3, 13.4, 13.6, 17.3,
problem. For example, subtract 10 – 8 by finding the
17.4
number that makes 10 when added to 8.
1.OA.
Add and subtract within 20.
5. Relate counting to addition and subtraction (e.g., by
counting on 2 to add 2).
1.OA.
1.OA.
1.OA.
6. Add and subtract within 20, demonstrating fluency for
addition and subtraction within 10. Use strategies such
as counting on, making a ten, decomposing a number
leading to a ten, using the relationship between
addition and subtraction; and creating equivalent but
easier or known sums.
Work with addition and subtraction equations.
7. Understand the meaning of the equal sign, and
determine if equations involving addition and
subtraction are true or false. For example, which of the
following equations are true and which are false? 6 =
6, 7 = 8 – 1, 5 + 2 = 2 + 5, 4 + 1 = 5 + 2
8. Determine the unknown whole number in an addition
or subtraction equation containing three whole
numbers. For example, correctly fill in the missing
addend in the problem 5 + ___ = 8.
MiF: 3.1, 4.1, 12.2, 13.1, 16.1, 16.3
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 13.5, 13.6,
14.1, 14.2
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 13.1, 13.2, 13.3,
13.4, 13.5, 13.6, 14.1, 14.2, 17.1, 17.2, 17.3, 19.4
MiF: 3.1, 3.3, 4.3, 8.1, 8.2, 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4, 13.5,
13.6, 14.2, 17.1, 17.2, 17.3, 17.4
23
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
1
Extend the counting sequence and explain reasoning
used.
1.NBT. 1. Count to 100, starting at any number less than 100. In
this range, read and write numerals and represent a
number of objects with a written numeral.
Resources
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 4.1, 4.4, 7.1, 7.2, 7.4, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3,
16.1, 16.2, 16.3
Understand place value and explain reasoning used.
1.NBT. 2. Understand that the two digits of a two-digit number
represent amounts of tens and ones. Specifically
understand the following:
MiF: 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4,
16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 17.1, 17.2, 17.3, 17.4
a. 10 can be thought of as a bundle of ten ones —
called a “ten.”
MiF: 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4
b. The numbers from 11 to 19 are composed of a ten
and one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or
nine ones.
MiF: 12.1, 12.2, 13.1, 13.3, 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 17.1, 17.3
c. The numbers 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90
refer to one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight,
or nine tens (and 0 ones).
1.NBT. 3. Compare two two-digit numbers based on meanings
of the tens and ones digits, recording the results of
comparisons with the symbols >, =, and <.
MiF: 7.3, 12.1, 16.3
24
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
1
Use place value understanding and properties of
operations to add and subtract.
1.NBT. 4. Add within 100, including adding a two-digit number
and a one-digit number, and adding a two-digit
number and a multiple of 10, using concrete models
or drawings and strategies based on place value,
properties of operations, and/or the relationship
between addition and subtraction; relate the strategy
to a written method and explain the reasoning used.
Understand that in adding two-digit numbers, one
adds tens and tens, ones and ones; and sometimes it
is necessary to compose a ten.
Understand that in adding two-digit numbers, one
adds tens and tens, ones and ones; and sometimes it
is necessary to compose a ten.
1.NBT. 5. Given a two-digit number, mentally find 10 more or 10
less than the number, without having to count; explain
the reasoning used.
1.NBT. 6. Subtract multiples of 10 in the range 10-90 from
multiples of 10 in the range 10-90 (positive or zero
differences), using concrete models or drawings and
strategies based on place value, properties of
operations, and/or the relationship between addition
and subtraction; relate the strategy to a written
method and explain the reasoning used.
Resources
MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4,
13.6, 14.1, 14.2, 17.1, 17.2, 17.3, 17.4
MiF: 14.1, 14.2
MiF: 13.3, 17.3
25
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
1.MD.
1.MD.
1
Measure lengths indirectly and by iterating length
units.
1. Order three objects by length; compare the lengths of
two objects indirectly by using a third object.
Resources
MiF: 9.2, 9.5
2. Express the length of an object as a whole number of
length units, by laying multiple copies of a shorter
object (the length unit) end to end.
a. Understand that the length measurement of an
MiF: 9.3, 9.5
object is the number of same-size length units that
span it with no gaps or overlaps. Limit to contexts
where the object being measured is spanned by a
whole number of length units with no gaps or
overlaps.
1.MD.
1.MD.
Tell and write time and explain reasoning used.
3. Tell and write time in hours and half-hours using
analog and digital clocks.
Represent and interpret data.
4. Organize, represent, and interpret data with up to
three categories; ask and answer questions about the
total number of data points, how many in each
category, and how many more or less are in one
category than in another.
MiF: 15.2, 15.3
MiF: 11.1, 11.2, 11.3
26
GEOMETRY
1.G.
1
Reason with shapes and their attributes and explain
reasoning used.
1. Recognize and draw shapes having specified
attributes, such as a given number of angles or a
given number of equal faces.5 Identify triangles,
quadrilaterals, pentagons, hexagons, and cubes.
Resources
MiF: 5.1
1.G.
2. Partition a rectangle into rows and columns of samesize squares and count to find the total number of
them.
MiF: 5.1, 5.3
1.G.
3. Partition circles and rectangles into two, three, or four
equal shares, describe the shares using the words
halves, thirds, half of, a third of, etc., and describe the
whole as two halves, three thirds, four fourths.
Recognize that equal shares of identical wholes need
not have the same shape.
MiF: 5.1
27
Grade 2
Standards and Expectations
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
2.OA.
2.OA.
2.OA.
2.OA.
2
Represent and solve problems involving addition and
subtraction.
1. Use addition and subtraction within 100 to solve one
and two-step word problems involving situations of
adding to, taking from, putting together, taking apart,
and comparing with unknowns in all positions, e.g., by
using drawings and equations with a symbol for the
unknown number to represent the problem.
Add and subtract within 20.
2. Fluently add and subtract within 20 using mental
strategies. By the end of grade 2, know from memory
all sums of two one-digit numbers.
Work with equal groups of objects to gain
foundations for multiplication.
3. Determine whether a group of objects (up to 20) has
an odd or even number of members, e.g., by pairing
objects or counting them by 2’s, write an equation to
express an even number as the sum of two equal
addends.
4. Use addition to find the total number of objects
arranged in rectangular arrays with up to 5 rows and
up to 5 columns, write an equation to express the
total.
Resources
MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 4.4, 10.1, 10.3, 13.5
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars, Math Windows
Open Response Practice (Chapter 2, Chapter 4, Chapter
11, Chapter 12)
MiF: 10.2, 10.4
MiF: 5.2A
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars, Math Windows
MiF: 6.2, 6.4, 6.5, 15.2, 15.4
28
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
2
Understand place value.
2.NBT. 1. Understand that the three digits of a three-digit
number represent amounts of hundreds, tens, and
ones; e.g., 706 equals 7 hundreds, 0 tens, and 6
ones. Understand the following as special cases:
a. 100 can be thought of as a bundle of ten tens —
called a “hundred.”
Resources
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5,
Math Windows
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5,
Calendar
b. The numbers 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700,
800, 900 refer to one, two, three, four, five, six,
seven, eight, or nine hundreds (and 0 tens and 0
ones).
2.NBT. 2. Count within 1000; skip-count by 5s, 10s, and 100s.
MiF: 1.1, 1.2
2.NBT. 3. Read and write numbers to 1000 using base-ten
numerals, number names, and expanded form.
2.NBT. 4. Compare two three-digit numbers based on meanings
of the hundreds, tens, and ones digits, using >, =, and
< symbols to record the results of comparisons.
Use place value understanding and properties of
operations to add and subtract.
2.NBT. 5. Fluently add and subtract within 100 using strategies
based on place value, properties of operations, and/or
the relationship between addition and subtraction.
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5
MiF: 2.1, 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 9.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4,
10.5, 13.5
Open Response Practice (Chapter 6)
2.NBT. 6. Add up to four two-digit numbers using strategies
based on place value and properties of operations.
MiF: 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3,
4.4, 9.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 13.5
MiF: 1.1, 1.4, 6.1, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6
Open Response Practice (Chapter 7)
MiF: 1.3
29
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
2
Resources
2.NBT. 7. Add and subtract within 1000, using concrete models
MiF: 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.2,
or drawings and strategies based on place value,
4.3, 4.4, 9.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 13.5
properties of operations, and/or the relationship
between addition and subtraction; relate the strategy
to a written method. Understand that in adding or
subtracting three digit numbers, one adds or subtracts
hundreds and hundreds, tens and tens, ones and
ones; and sometimes it is necessary to compose or
decompose tens or hundreds.
2.NBT. 8. Mentally add 10 or 100 to a given number 100–900,
and mentally subtract 10 or 100 from a given number
100–900.
MiF: 10.2 10.3, 10.4
2.NBT. 9. Explain why addition and subtraction strategies work,
using place value and the properties of operations.
MiF: 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3,
4.4, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5, 13.5
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars, Math Windows
30
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
2.MD.
2
Measure and estimate lengths in standard units.
1. Measure the length of an object by selecting and
using appropriate tools such as rulers, yardsticks,
meter sticks, and measuring tapes.
Resources
MiF: 7.1, 7.3, 7.4, 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, 13.4
Open Response Practice (Chapter 9)
2.MD.
2. Measure the length of an object twice, using length
units of different lengths for the two measurements;
describe how the two measurements relate to the size
of the unit chosen.
MiF: 8.3, 13.4a
Math Windows
2.MD.
3. Estimate lengths using units of inches, feet,
centimeters, and meters.
MiF: 7.1, 7.3, 13.1, 13.3
Open Response Practice (Chapter 9)
2.MD.
4. Measure to determine how much longer one object is
than another, expressing the length difference in
terms of a standard length unit.
MiF: 7.2, 7.4, 13.2, 13.4
2.MD.
2.MD.
2.MD.
Relate addition and subtraction to length.
5. Use addition and subtraction within 100 to solve word
problems involving lengths that are given in the same
units, e.g., by using drawings (such as drawings of
rulers) and equations with a symbol for the unknown
number to represent the problem.
6. Represent whole numbers as lengths from 0 on a
given number line diagram with equally spaced points
corresponding to the numbers 0, 1, 2, ..., and
represent whole-number sums and differences within
100 on a number line diagram.
Work with time and money.
7. Tell and write time from analog and digital clocks to
the nearest five minutes, using a.m. and p.m.
MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 7.5, 9.3, 13.5, 16.1, 16.2, 16.3
Open Response Practice (Chapter 9)
MiF: 1.4, 3.5, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 7.5, 9.3, 10.5, 13.5, 16.1,
16.2, 16.3
MiF: 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.4
Math Windows
31
2.MD.
2.MD.
2.MD.
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
2
Resources
8. Solve word problems involving dollar bills, quarters,
MiF: 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.3a
dimes, nickels, and pennies, using $ and ¢ symbols
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars, Math Windows
appropriately. Example: If you have 2 dimes and 3
Open Response Practice (Chapter 10)
pennies, how many cents do you have?
Represent and interpret data.
9. Generate measurement data by measuring lengths of
several objects to the nearest whole unit, or by
making repeated measurements of the same object.
Show the measurements by making a line plot, where
the horizontal scale is marked off in whole-number
units.
10. Draw a picture graph and a bar graph (with single-unit
scale) to represent a data set with up to four
categories. Solve simple put together, take-apart, and
compare problems using information presented in a
bar graph.
MiF: 17.2a
MiF: 17.1, 17.2, 17.3
32
GEOMETRY
2
Reason with shapes and their attributes.
Resources
2.G.
1. Recognize and draw shapes having specified
attributes, such as a given number of angles or a
given number of equal faces.5 Identify triangles,
quadrilaterals, pentagons, hexagons, and cubes.
MiF: 18.2, 19.1, 19.1a, 19.2, 19.2a, 19.3
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars, Math Windows
Open Response Practice (Chapter 5)
2.G.
2. Partition a rectangle into rows and columns of samesize squares and count to find the total number of
them (e.g., on geoboard).
MiF: 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars
Open Response Practice (Chapter 8)
2.G.
3. Partition circles and rectangles into two, three, or four
equal shares, describe the shares using the words
halves, thirds, half of, a third of, etc., and describe the
whole as two halves, three thirds, four fourths.
Recognize that equal shares of identical wholes need
not have the same shape.
MiF: 12.1, 12.2, 12.3
Problem Solving Extensions Exemplars
Open Response Practice (Chapter 8)
33
Grade 3
Standards and Expectations
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
3.OA.
3
Represent and solve problems involving
multiplication and division.
1. Interpret products of whole numbers, e.g., interpret 5
× 7 as the total number of objects in 5 groups of 7
objects each. For example, describe a context in
which a total number of objects can be expressed as
5 × 7.
Resources
MiF: 6.2, 6.3, 6.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
Transition times throughout the day
3.OA.
2. Interpret whole-number quotients of whole numbers,
MiF: 6.6, 6.7, 8.2
e.g., interpret 56 ÷ 8 as the number of objects in each Transition times throughout the day
share when 56 objects are partitioned equally into 8
shares, or as a number of shares when 56 objects are
partitioned into equal shares of 8 objects each. For
example, describe a context in which a number of
shares or a number of groups can be expressed as 56
÷ 8.
3.OA.
3. Use multiplication and division within 100 to solve
word problems in situations involving equal groups,
arrays, and measurement quantities, e.g., by using
drawings and equations with a symbol for the
unknown number to represent the problem.
34
MiF: 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 8.2, 8.4, 8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3,
9.4, 12.1, 12.2,
3.OA.
3.OA.
3.OA.
3.OA.
3.OA.
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
3
Resources
4. Determine the unknown whole number in a
MiF: 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.7, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3,
multiplication or division equation relating three whole 9.4, 12.1, 12.2
numbers. For example, determine the unknown
number that makes the equation true in each of the
equations 8 × ? = 48, 5 = ÷ 3, 6 × 6 = ?
Understand properties of multiplication and the
relationship between multiplication and division.
5. Apply properties of operations as strategies to multiply
and divide. Examples: If 6 × 4 = 24 is known, then 4 ×
6 = 24 is also known. (Commutative property of
multiplication.) 3 × 5 × 2 can be found by 3 × 5 = 15,
then 15 × 2 = 30, or by 5 × 2 = 10, then 3 × 10 = 30.
(Associative property of multiplication.) Knowing that 8
× 5 = 40 and 8 × 2 = 16, one can find 8 × 7 as 8 × (5 +
2) = (8 × 5) + (8 × 2) = 40 + 16 = 56. (Distributive
property.)
6. Understand division as an unknown-factor problem.
For example, find 32 ÷ 8 by finding the number that
makes 32 when multiplied by 8.
Multiply and divide within 100.
7. Fluently multiply and divide within 100, using
strategies such as the relationship between
multiplication and division (e.g., knowing that 8 × 5 =
40, one knows 40 ÷ 5 = 8) or properties of operations.
By the end of Grade 3, know from memory all
products of two one-digit numbers.
8. Solve two-step word problems using the four
operations. Represent these problems using
equations with a letter standing for the unknown
quantity. Assess the reasonableness of answers using
mental computation and estimation strategies
including rounding.
35
MiF: 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3,
8.4, 8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 12.1, 12.2
MiF: 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2,
8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 12.1, 12.2
MiF; 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2,
8.3, 8.4, 8.5, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 12.1, 12.2
Morning Meeting/Calendar
Transition times throughout the day
MiF: 2.4, 5.1, 9.2, 9.4
3.OA.
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
3
Resources
9. Identify arithmetic patterns (including patterns in the
MiF: 1.1, 1.3, 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 7.1, 8.2
addition table or multiplication table), and explain
Math Windows
them using properties of operations. For example,
observe that 4 times a number is always even, and
explain why 4 times a number can be decomposed
into two equal addends.
36
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
3
Use place value understanding and properties of
operations to perform multi-digit arithmetic.
3.NBT. 1. Use place value understanding to round whole
numbers to the nearest 10 or 100.
Resources
MiF: 2.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
3.NBT. 2. Fluently add and subtract within 1000 using strategies
and algorithms based on place value, properties of
operations, and/or the relationship between addition
and subtraction.
MiF:
2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1,
10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 19.4, 19.5
Morning Meeting/Calendar
3.NBT. 3. Multiply one-digit whole numbers by multiples of 10 in
the range 10–90 (e.g., 9 × 80, 5 × 60) using strategies
based on place value and properties of operations.
MiF: 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 7.1, 7.3
37
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
3.NF.
3.NF.
3
Develop understanding of fractions as numbers.
1. Understand a fraction 1/b as the quantity formed by 1
part when a whole is partitioned into b equal parts;
understand a fraction a/b as the quantity formed by a
parts of size 1/b.
MiF: 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.6
2. Understand a fraction as a number on the number
line; represent fractions on a number line diagram.
a. Represent a fraction 1/b on a number line diagram
3.NF.
Resources
by defining the interval from 0 to 1 as the whole
and partitioning it into b equal parts. Recognize
that each part has size 1/b and that the endpoint of
the part based at 0 locates the number 1/b on the
number line.
b. Represent a fraction a/b on a number line diagram
by marking off a lengths 1/b from 0. Recognize that
the resulting interval has size a/b and that its
endpoint locates the number a/b on the number
line.
3. Explain equivalence of fractions in special cases, and
compare fractions by reasoning about their size.
a. Understand two fractions as equivalent (equal) if
they are the same size, or the same point on a
number line.
38
MiF: 14.2, 14.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
MiF: 14.2, 14.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
MiF: 14.2, 14.3, 14.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
3
Resources
MiF: 14.2, 14.3, 14.4
b. Recognize and generate simple equivalent
1
2
4
2
Morning Meeting/Calendar
fractions, e.g., /2 = /4, /6 = /3). Explain why the
fractions are equivalent, e.g., by using a visual
fraction model.
c. Express whole numbers as fractions, and
recognize fractions that are equivalent to whole
numbers. Examples: Express 3 in the form 3 = 3/1;
recognize that 6/1 = 6; locate 4/4 and 1 at the same
point of a number line diagram.
d. Compare two fractions with the same numerator or
the same denominator by reasoning about their
size. Recognize that comparisons are only valid
when the two fractions refer to the same whole.
Record the results with the symbols >, =, or <, and
justify the conclusions, e.g. by using a visual
fraction model.
39
MiF: 14.1, 14.6
Morning Meeting/Calendar
MiF: 14.4
Morning Meeting/Calendar
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
3.MD.
3.MD.
3.MD.
3.MD.
3
Solve problems involving measurement and
estimation of intervals of time, liquid volumes, and
masses of objects.
1. Tell and write time to the nearest minute and measure
time intervals in minutes. Solve word problems
involving addition and subtraction of time intervals in
minutes, e.g., by representing the problem on a
number line diagram.
2. Measure and estimate liquid volumes and masses of
objects using standard units of grams (g), kilograms
(kg), and liters (l). Add, subtract, multiply, or divide to
solve one-step word problems involving masses or
volumes that are given in the same units, e.g., by
using drawings (such as a beaker with a
measurement scale) to represent the problem.
Represent and interpret data.
3. Draw a scaled picture graph and a scaled bar graph to
represent a data set with several categories. Solve
one- and two-step “how many more” and “how many
less” problems using information presented in scaled
bar graphs. For example, draw a bar graph in which
each square in the bar graph might represent 5 pets.
4. Generate measurement data by measuring lengths
using rulers marked with halves and fourths of an
inch. Show the data by making a line plot, where the
horizontal scale is marked off in appropriate units—
whole numbers, halves, or quarters.
40
Resources
MiF: 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4, 16.5, 16.7
Morning Meeting
Transitions throughout the day
Math Windows
MiF: 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2
Math Windows
MiF: 13.1, 13.2, 13.3
Morning Meeting/Calendar
Periodicals/Current Events
Math Windows
MiF: 13.3, 14.2, 14.4, 15.1
Math Windows
3.MD.
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
3
Geometric measurement: understand concepts of
area and relate area to multiplication and to addition.
5. Recognize area as an attribute of plane figures and
understand concepts of area measurement.
a. A square with side length 1 unit, called “a unit
square,” is said to have “one square unit” of area,
and can be used to measure area.
b. A plane figure which can be covered without gaps
or overlaps by n unit squares is said to have an
area of n square units.
3.MD.
6. Measure areas by counting unit squares (square cm,
square m, square in, square ft, and improvised units).
3.MD.
7. Relate area to the operations of multiplication and
addition.
a. Find the area of a rectangle with whole-number
side lengths by tiling it, and show that the area is
the same as would be found by multiplying the
side lengths.
b. Multiply side lengths to find areas of rectangles
with whole number side lengths in the context of
solving real world and mathematical problems, and
represent whole-number products as rectangular
areas in mathematical reasoning.
41
Resources
MiF: 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 19.4
Math Windows
MiF: 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 19.4
Math Windows
MiF: 19.1, 19.2, 19.3, 19.4
Math Windows
MiF: 15.1
Math Windows
MiF: 15.1
Math Windows
3.MD.
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
3
Resources
c. Use tiling to show in a concrete case that the area MiF: 15.1
Math Windows
of a rectangle with whole-number side lengths a
and b + c is the sum of a × b and a × c. Use area
models to represent the distributive property in
mathematical reasoning.
MiF: 19.2, 19.3, 19.4
d. Recognize area as additive. Find areas of
Math Windows
rectilinear figures by decomposing them into nonoverlapping rectangles and adding the areas of the
non-overlapping parts, applying this technique to
solve real world problems.
Geometric measurement: recognize perimeter as an
attribute of plane figures and distinguish between
linear and area measures.
8. Solve real world and mathematical problems involving MiF: 19.4, 19.5
perimeters of polygons, including finding the perimeter Morning Meeting
given the side lengths, finding an unknown side
Math Windows
length, and exhibiting rectangles with the same
perimeter and different areas or with the same area
and different perimeters.
42
GEOMETRY
3.G.
3.G.
3
Reason with shapes and their attributes.
1. Understand that shapes in different categories (e.g.,
rhombuses, rectangles, and others) may share
attributes (e.g., having four sides), and that the shared
attributes can define a larger category (e.g.,
quadrilaterals). Recognize rhombuses, rectangles,
and squares as examples of quadrilaterals, and draw
examples of quadrilaterals that do not belong to any of
these subcategories.
2. Partition shapes into parts with equal areas. Express
the area of each part as a unit fraction of the whole.
For example, partition a shape into 4 parts with equal
area, and describe the area of each part as 14 of the
area of the shape. 12, 14, 18, 116
43
Resources
17.1, 17.2, 18.1, 18.3,
Math Windows
MiF: 14.1, 14.2, 14.3, 14.4, 14.5,
Math Windows
Grade 4
Standards and Expectations
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
4.OA.
4.OA.
4.OA.
4.OA.
4.OA.
4
Use the four operations with whole numbers to solve
problems.
1. Interpret a multiplication equation as a comparison
(e.g., interpret 35= 5 × 7 as a statement that 35 is 5
times as many as 7 and 7 times as many as 5 or as
repeated addition).
2. Multiply or divide to solve word problems (e.g., by
using drawings and number models with a symbol for
the unknown number to represent the problem).
3. Solve multistep word problems posed with whole
numbers and having whole-number answers using the
four operations, including problems in which
remainders must be interpreted. Represent these
problems using equations with a letter standing for the
unknown quantity. Assess the reasonableness of
answers using mental computation and estimation
strategies including rounding.
Gain familiarity with factors and multiples.
4. Find all factor pairs for a whole number in the range
1–100. Recognize that a whole number is a multiple of
each of its factors. Determine whether a whole
number is a multiple of a one-digit number. Determine
whether a whole number in the range 1–100 is prime
or composite.
Generate and analyze patterns.
5. Generate a number or shape pattern that follows a
given rule. Make conclusions about the pattern. For
example, given the rule “Add 3” and the starting
number 1, explain why the pattern alternates between
odd and even numbers.
44
Resources
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.5
Math Windows
Online Games
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 6.8, CCFL 3.5.a
MiF: 2.1, 2.3, 3.5, 5.6, 6.8, 8.3, 11.2, 12.4, CCFL 3.5.a
Open Response 4th grade Resource
Discrete Math 4th grade Resource
MiF: 2.2
Morning Meeting Message
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 7.3, 13.3, 14.1, 14.2
Math Windows
Online Games
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
4
Generalize place value understanding for multi-digit
whole numbers.
4.NBT. 1. Recognize that in a multi-digit whole number, a digit in
one place represents ten times what it represents in
the place to its right. For example, recognize that 700
÷ 70 = 10 by applying concepts of place value and
division.
Resources
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2
Math Windows
Morning Meeting Message
Online Games
4.NBT. 2. Read and write multi-digit whole numbers using baseten numerals, number names, and expanded form.
Compare two multi-digit numbers based on meanings
of the digits in each place, using >, =, and < symbols
to record the results of comparisons.
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.3, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2
Math Windows
Online Games
4.NBT. 3. Use place value understanding to round multi-digit
whole numbers to any place.
MiF: 2.1, 2.3, 3.2,
Math Windows
Morning Meeting Message
Online Games
Foss Science Investigations
Use place value understanding and properties of
operations to perform multi-digit arithmetic.
4.NBT. 4. Fluently add and subtract multi-digit whole numbers
using a standard algorithm.
4.NBT. 5. Multiply a whole number up to four digits by a onedigit whole number, and multiply two two-digit
numbers, using strategies based on place value and
the properties of operations. Illustrate and explain the
calculation by using equations, rectangular arrays,
and/or area models.
45
MiF: 2.1, 2.3, 3.2, 8.1, 8.2, 12.3, CCFL 1.2.a, 1.2.b
Math Windows
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 12.1, CCFL 3.0, 3.1.a
Math Windows
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
4
4.NBT. 6. Find whole-number quotients and remainders with up MiF: 3.3, 3.4, 3.5
to four-digit dividends and one-digit divisors, using
Math Windows
strategies based on place value, the properties of
operations, and/or the relationship between
multiplication and division. Illustrate and explain the
calculation by using equations, rectangular arrays,
and/or area models.
46
Resources
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
4.NF.
4.NF.
4
Extend understanding of fraction equivalence and
ordering.
1. Explain why a fraction ab is equivalent to a fraction (ab
x nn) by using visual fraction models, with attention to
how the number and size of the parts differ even
though the two fractions themselves are the same
size. Use this principle to recognize and generate
equivalent fractions
MiF: 5.5, 5.6, 6.1, 6.3, 6.6, 6.8, 7.5
Online Games
2. Compare two fractions with different numerators and
different denominators, e.g., by creating common
denominators or numerators, or by comparing to a
benchmark fraction such as 12.
a. Recognize that comparisons are valid only when
the two fractions refer to the same whole.
4.NF.
Resources
MiF: CCFL 6.0
Grade 3 lesson 14.4
Online Games
b. Compare the results with symbols >, =, or <, and
Math Literature Picture Books
justify the conclusions, e.g., by using a visual
fraction model.
Build fractions from unit fractions by applying and
extending previous understandings of operations on
whole numbers.
3. Understand a fraction ab with a>1 as a sum of
fractions 1b.
a. Understand addition and subtraction of fractions by MiF: 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 6.6, 6.8, 7.5
joining and separating parts of the same whole.
MiF: 6.4, 6.5
b. Break down fractions into a sum of fractions, e.g.,
3
1
1
1
/8 = /8 + /8 + /8
c. Add and subtract mixed numbers with like
denominators.
MiF: 4.3, 5.1, 6.6
47
4.NF.
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
4
Resources
d. Solve word problems involving addition and
MiF: 6.8
subtraction of fractions having like denominators,
Open Response Resource
e.g., by using visual fraction models and equations
to represent the problem.
4. Apply and extend previous understandings of
multiplication to multiply a fraction by a whole number.
a. Understand a fraction ab as a multiple of 1b. For
example, use a visual fraction model to represent
5
4 as the product 5 × (14), recording the conclusion
by the equation 54 = 5 × (14).
b. Understand a multiple of ab as a multiple of 1b, and
use this understanding to multiply a fraction by a
whole number. For example, use a visual fraction
model to express 3 x (25) as 6 x (15), recognizing
this product as 65. (In general, n x (ab) = (n x a)b.)
c. Solve word problems involving multiplication of a
fraction by a whole number, e.g., by using visual
fraction models and equations to represent the
problem. For example, if each person at a party
will eat 3/8 of a pound of roast beef, and there will
be 5 people at the party, how many pounds of
roast beef will be needed? Between what two
whole numbers does your answer lie?
4.NF.
Understand decimal notation for fractions, and
compare decimal fractions.
a. Express a fraction with denominator 10 as an
equivalent fraction with denominator 100, and use
this technique to add two fractions with respective
denominators 10 and 100. For example, express
3
10 as 30100, and add 310 + 4100 = 34100.
48
MiF: 6.4, 6.5
MiF: 6.7, 6.8,
MiF: 6.7, 6.8, CCFL 6.7.a
Open Response Resource
MiF: 7.2, 8.1
Open Response Resource
4.NF.
4.NF.
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
4
Resources
MiF: 7.1, 7.2, 7.5
b. Use decimal notation for fractions with
denominators 10 or 100. For example, rewrite 0.62 Math Windows
Open Response Resource
as 62100; describe a length as 0.62 meters; locate
0.62 on a number line diagram.
c. Compare two decimals to hundredths by reasoning MiF: 7.2, 7.3
about their size. Record the results of comparisons Math Windows
Open Response Resource
with the symbols >, =, or <, and justify the
conclusions, e.g., by using a visual model.
49
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
4.MD.
4
Solve problems involving measurement and
conversion of measurements from a larger unit to a
smaller unit.
1. Know relative sizes of measurement units including
km, m, cm; kg, g; lb, oz.; l, ml; hr, min, sec.
a. Within a single system of measurement, express
measurements in a larger unit in terms of a smaller
unit. Record measurement equivalents in a two
column table. For example, know that 1 ft is 12
times as long as 1 in. Express the length of a 4 ft
snake as 48 in. Generate a conversion table for
feet and inches listing the number pairs (1, 12), (2,
24), (3, 36), ...
4.MD.
2. Use the four operations to solve word problems
involving distances, intervals of time, liquid volumes,
masses of objects, and money.
Resources
MiF: 6.3, 6.8, 7.1, 7.4, 8.3, 11.1, 11.2, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3,
12.4, CCFL 12.0.a, 12.0.b, 12.0.c
Math Windows
Foss Science Investigations
MiF: 6.8, 8.3, 11.1, 11.2, 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 12.4, CCFL
12.0.d
Math Windows
Open Response Resource
a. Including problems involving simple fractions or
decimals, and problems that require expressing
measurements given in a larger unit in terms of a
smaller unit.
b. Represent measurement quantities using
diagrams such as number line diagrams that
feature a measurement scale.
4.MD.
3. Apply the area and perimeter formulas for rectangles
in real world and mathematical problems. For
example, find the width of a rectangular room given
the area of the flooring and the length, by viewing the
area formula as a multiplication equation.
50
MiF: 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 12.4
Math Windows
4.MD.
4.MD.
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
4
Represent and interpret data.
4. Make a line plot to display a data set of
MiF: CCFL 6.8.a
Grade 3 lesson 13.3
measurements in fractions of a unit (12, 14, 18). Solve
problems involving addition and subtraction of
fractions by using information presented in line plots.
For example, from a line plot find the range of head
sizes of children in the class.
Geometric measurement: understand concepts of
angle and measure angles.
5. Recognize angles as geometric shapes that are
formed wherever two rays share a common endpoint,
and understand concepts of angle measurement.
a. An angle is measured with reference to a circle
with its center at the common endpoint of the rays,
by considering the fraction of the circular arc
between the points where the two rays intersect
the circle.
b. Recognize an angle that turns through 1360 of a
circle is called a “one-degree angle,” and can be
used to measure angles.
Resources
MiF: 9.1, 9.3, CCFL 9.3.a
Math Windows
MiF: 9.3
4.MD.
6. Measure angles in whole-number degrees using a
protractor. Sketch angles of specified measure.
MiF: 9.1, 9.2, 9.3,
4.MD.
7. Recognize angle measure as part of a 360° circle.
a. Solve addition and subtraction problems to find
unknown angles on a diagram in real world and
mathematical problems (e.g., calculating reflex
angles; using an equation with a symbol for the
unknown angle measure).
MiF: 9.2, 11.2, CCFL 9.3.b
51
GEOMETRY
4.G.
4
Draw and identify lines and angles, and classify
shapes by properties of their lines and angles.
1. Draw points, lines, line segments, rays, angles (right,
acute, obtuse), and perpendicular and parallel lines.
Identify these in two-dimensional figures.
Resources
MiF: 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3
Math Windows
4.G.
2. Classify two-dimensional figures based on the
MiF: 10.1, 10.2, 11.1, 11.2
presence or absence of parallel or perpendicular lines, Math Windows
or the presence or absence of angles of a specified
Open Response Resource
size. Recognize right triangles as a category, and
identify right triangles.
4.G.
3. Recognize a line of symmetry for a two-dimensional
figure as a line across the figure such that the figure
can be folded along the line into matching parts.
Identify line-symmetric figures and draw lines of
symmetry.
52
MiF: 13.1, 13.3,
Math Windows
Grade 5
Standards and Expectations
OPERATIONS AND ALGEBRAIC THINKING
5
Write and interpret numerical expressions.
Resources
5.OA.
1. Use parentheses, brackets, or braces in numerical
expressions, and evaluate expressions with these
symbols.
MiF: 2.3, 2.3, 2.4, 2.6, 2.7, 5.1, 5.3, 5.4
CCFL: 2.6a
5.OA.
2. Write simple expressions that record calculations with
numbers, and interpret numerical expressions without
evaluating them. For example, express the calculation
“add 8 and 7, then multiply by 2” as 2 × (8 + 7).
Recognize that 3 × (18932 + 921) is three times as
large as 18932 + 921, without having to calculate the
indicated sum or product.
MiF: 2.6, 2.7, 5.1
5.OA.
Analyze patterns and relationships.
3. Generate two numerical patterns using two given
MiF: 2.2, 2.4, 11.2, 11.4
rules. Identify apparent relationships between
corresponding terms. Form ordered pairs consisting of
corresponding terms from the two patterns, and graph
the ordered pairs on a coordinate plane. For example,
given the rule “Add 3” and the starting number 0, and
given the rule “Add 6” and the starting number 0,
generate terms in the resulting sequences, and
observe that the terms in one sequence are twice the
corresponding terms in the other sequence. Explain
informally why this is so.
53
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
5
Understand the place value system.
5.NBT. 1. Recognize that in a multi-digit number, a digit in one
place represents 10 times as much as it represents in
the place to its right and 110 of what it represents in
the place to its left.
Resources
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 2.4, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4
5.NBT. 2. Explain patterns in the number of zeros of the product MiF: 2.2, 2.4, 9.2, 9.4
when multiplying a number by powers of 10, and
CCFL: 2.2a, 9.2a
explain patterns in the placement of the decimal point
when a decimal is multiplied or divided by a power of
10. Use whole-number exponents to denote powers of
10.
5.NBT. 3. Read, write, and compare decimals to thousandths.
MiF: 8.1, 8.3
a. Read and write decimals to thousandths using
base-ten numerals, number names, and expanded
form [e.g., 347.392 = 3 × 100 + 4 × 10 + 7 × 1 + 3
× (110) + 9 × (1100) + 2 × (11000)].
b. Compare two decimals to thousandths based on
MiF: 8.2
meanings of the digits in each place, using >, =,
and < symbols to record the results of
comparisons.
5.NBT. 4. Use place value understanding to round decimals to
any place.
54
MiF: 8.2, 9.3, 9.5, 9.6
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS IN BASE TEN
5
Perform operations with multi-digit whole numbers
and with decimals to hundredths.
Resources
5.NBT. 5. Fluently multiply multi-digit whole numbers using the
standard algorithm.
MiF: 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.6, 2.7, 15.3, 15.5,
5.NBT. 6. Find whole-number quotients of whole numbers with
up to four-digit dividends and two-digit dividends and
two-digit divisors, using strategies based on place
value, the properties of operations, and/or the
relationship between multiplication and division.
Illustrate and explain the calculation by using
equations, rectangular arrays, and/or area models.
5.NBT 7. Add, subtract, multiply, and divide decimals to
hundredths, using concrete models or drawings and
strategies based on place value properties of
operations, and/or the relationship between addition
and subtraction; relate the strategy to a written
method and explain the reasoning used.
MiF 2.1, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7
55
MiF: 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
5.NF.
5.NF.
5.NF.
5
Resources
Use equivalent fractions as a strategy to add and
subtract fractions.
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7
1. Add and subtract fractions with unlike denominators
(including mixed numbers) by replacing given
fractions with equivalent fractions in such a way as to
produce an equivalent sum or difference of fractions
with like denominators. For example, 23 + 54 = 812 +
15
12 = 2312. (In general, ab + cd = (ad + bc)bd.)
MiF: 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7
2. Solve word problems involving addition and
subtraction of fractions referring to the same whole,
including cases of unlike denominators (e.g., by using
visual fraction models or equations to represent the
problem). Use benchmark fractions and number
sense of fractions to estimate mentally and assess the
reasonableness of answers. For example, recognize
an incorrect result 25+12 = 37, by observing that 37<12.
Apply and extend previous understandings of
multiplication and division to multiply and divide
fractions.
3. Interpret a fraction as division of the numerator by the MiF: 3.3, 3.4, 3.7
denominator (ab = a ÷ b). Solve word problems
involving division of whole numbers leading to
answers in the form of fractions or mixed numbers,
e.g., by using visual fraction models or equations to
represent the problem. For example, interpret 34 as
the result of dividing 3 by 4, noting that 34 multiplied
by 4 equals 3, and that when 3 wholes are shared
equally among 4 people each person has a share of
size 34. If 9 people want to share a 50-pound sack of
rice equally by weight, how many pounds of rice
should each person get? Between what two whole
numbers does your answer lie?
56
5.NF.
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
5
Resources
4. Apply and extend previous understandings of
multiplication to multiply a fraction or whole number by
a fraction.
a. Comparing the size of a product to the size of one MiF: 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.7
factor on the basis of the size of the other factor,
without performing the indicated multiplication.
b. Find the area of a rectangle with fractional side
MiF: 4.1, 4.3, CCFL 6.0
lengths by tiling it with unit squares of the
appropriate unit fraction side lengths, and show
that the area is the same as would be found by
multiplying the side lengths. Multiply fractional side
lengths to find areas of rectangles, and represent
fraction products as rectangular areas.
5.NF.
5. Interpret multiplication as scaling (resizing), by:
a. Comparing the size of a product to the size of one
4.1, 7.2, 7.5, 7.6, CCFL 4.0
factor on the basis of the size of the other factor,
without performing the indicated multiplication.
b. Explaining why multiplying a given number by a
fraction greater than 1 results in a product greater
than the given number (recognizing multiplication
by whole numbers greater than 1 as a familiar
case); explaining why multiplying a given number
by a fraction less than 1 results in a product
smaller than the given number; and relating the
principle of fraction equivalence ab = (n×a)(n×b) to the
effect of multiplying ab by 1.
57
MiF: 4.1, 4.3, 4.4, 9.1, 9.2
5.NF.
5.NF.
NUMBER AND OPERATIONS – FRACTIONS
5
Resources
6. Solve real world problems involving multiplication of
MiF 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.5, 4.7
fractions and mixed numbers (e.g., by using visual
fraction models or equations to represent the
problem).
7. Apply and extend previous understandings of division
to divide unit fractions by whole numbers and whole
numbers by unit fractions.
a. Interpret division of a unit fraction by a non-zero
MiF: 4.6, 4.7
whole number, and compute such quotients. For
example, create a story context for (13) ÷ 4, and
use a visual fraction model to show the quotient.
Use the relationship between multiplication and
division to explain that (13) ÷ 4 = 112 because (112)
× 4 = 13.
CCFL 4.6a
b. Interpret division of a whole number by a unit
fraction, and compute such quotients. For
example, create a story context for 4 ÷ (15), and
use a visual fraction model to show the quotient.
Use the relationship between multiplication and
division to explain that 4 ÷ (15) = 20 because 20 ×
(15) = 4.
c. Solve real world problems involving division of unit
fractions by non-zero whole numbers and division
of whole numbers by unit fractions, e.g., by using
visual fraction models and equations to represent
the problem. For example, how much chocolate
will each person get if 3 people share 12 lb of
chocolate equally? How many 13-cup servings are
in 2 cups of raisins?
58
MiF: 4.6, 4.7, CCFL 4.7a
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
5.MD.
5.MD.
5.MD.
5
Resources
Convert like measurement units within a given
measurement system.
1. Convert among different-sized standard measurement MiF: 3.3, 7.4, 11.2, 15.5
units within a given measurement system (e.g.,
convert 5 cm to 0.05 m), and use these conversions in
solving multi-step, real world problems.
Represent and interpret data.
2. Make a line plot to display a data set of
MiF: CCFL 11.1a
1
1
1
measurements in fractions of a unit ( 2, 4, 8). Use
operations on fractions for this grade to solve
problems involving information presented in line plots.
For example, given different measurements of liquid in
identical beakers, find the amount of liquid each
beaker would contain if the total amount in all the
beakers were redistributed equally.
Geometric measurement: understand concepts of
volume and relate volume to multiplication and to
addition.
3. Recognize volume as an attribute of solid figures and
understand concepts of volume measurement.
a. A cube with side length 1 unit, called a “unit cube,”
MiF: 15.4, 15.5
is said to have “one cubic unit” of volume, and can
be used to measure volume.
b. A solid figure which can be packed without gaps or MiF: 15.4, 15.5
overlaps using n unit cubes is said to have a
volume of n cubic units.
5.MD.
4. Measure volumes by counting unit cubes, using cubic
cm, cubic in, cubic ft, and improvised units.
59
MiF: 15.4, 15.5
5.MD.
MEASUREMENT AND DATA
5
5. Relate volume to the operations of multiplication and
addition and solve real world and mathematical
problems involving volume.
a. Find the volume of a right rectangular prism with
MiF: 15.4, 15.5, CCFL 15.5a
whole-number side lengths by packing it with unit
cubes, and show that the volume is the same as
would be found by multiplying the edge lengths,
equivalently by multiplying the height by the area
of the base. Represent threefold whole-number
products as volumes (e.g., to represent the
associative property of multiplication).
b. Apply the formulas V = l × w × h and V = b × h for
MiF: 15.5
rectangular prisms to find volumes of right
rectangular prisms with whole number edge
lengths in the context of solving real world and
mathematical problems.
c. Recognize volume as additive. Find volumes of
solid figures composed of two non-overlapping
right rectangular prisms by adding the volumes of
the non-overlapping parts, applying this technique
to solve real world problems.
60
Resources
MiF 15.4, CCFL 15.5b
GEOMETRY
5.G.
5.G.
5.G.
5.G.
5
Graph points on the coordinate plane to solve realworld and mathematical problems.
1. Use a pair of perpendicular number lines, called axes, MiF: 11.2
to define a coordinate system, with the intersection of
the lines (the origin) arranged to coincide with the 0 on
each line and a given point in the plane located by
using an ordered pair of numbers, called its
coordinates. Understand that the first number
indicates how far to travel from the origin in the
direction of one axis, and the second number
indicates how far to travel in the direction of the
second axis, with the convention that the names of the
two axes and the coordinates correspond (e.g., x-axis
and x-coordinate, y-axis and y-coordinate).
2. Represent real world and mathematical problems by
graphing points in the first quadrant of the coordinate
plane, and interpret coordinate values of points in the
context of the situation.
Classify two-dimensional figures into categories
based on their properties.
3. Understand that attributes belonging to a category of
two-dimensional figures also belong to all
subcategories of that category. For example, all
rectangles have four right angles and squares are
rectangles, so all squares have four right angles.
4. Classify two-dimensional figures in a hierarchy based
on properties.
61
MiF: 11.2
MiF: 13.1, 13.3, 13.5
MiF: 13.1, 13.3, 13.5
Resources
Grade 6
Standards and Expectations
6.RP
6.RP
6.RP
RATIOS AND PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS
6
Understand ratio concepts and use ratio reasoning to
solve problems.
1. Understand the concept of a ratio and use ratio
MiF Chapter 4.1-4.3
language to describe a ratio relationship between two
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
quantities. For example, “The ratio of wings to beaks in
the bird house at the zoo was 2:1, because for every 2
Math Windows
wings there was 1 beak.” “For every vote candidate A
received, candidate C received nearly three votes.”
2. Understand the concept of a unit rate a/b associated
with a ratio a:b with b ≠ 0, and use rate language in the
context of a ratio relationship. For example, “This recipe
has a ratio of 3 cups of flour to 4 cups of sugar, so there
is 3/4 cup of flour for each cup of sugar.” “We paid $75
for 15 hamburgers, which is a rate of $5 per hamburger.
Resources
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
Math Windows
3. Use ratio and rate reasoning to solve real-world and
mathematical problems, e.g., by reasoning about tables
of equivalent ratios, tape diagrams, double number line
diagrams, or equations.
a. Make tables of equivalent ratios relating quantities
with whole number measurements, find missing
values in the tables, and plot the pairs of values on
the coordinate plane. Use tables to compare ratios.
b. Solve unit rate problems including those involving
unit pricing and constant speed. For example, if it
took 7 hours to mow 4 lawns, then at that rate, how
many lawns could be mowed in 35 hours? At what
rate were lawns being mowed?
62
MiF Chapter 4.1-4.3
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
MiF Chapter 6.1-6.5
Math Windows - equivalent ratios
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
RATIOS AND PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS
6
c. Find a percent of a quantity as a rate per 100 (e.g.,
MiF Chapter 6.1-6.5
30% of a quantity means 30/100 times the quantity);
solve problems involving finding the whole, given a
part and the percent.
d. Use ratio reasoning to convert measurement units;
manipulate and transform units appropriately when
multiplying or dividing quantities.
63
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
Resources
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
6.NS
6.NS
6.NS
6.NS
6
Apply and extend previous understandings of
multiplication and division to divide fractions by
fractions.
1. Interpret and compute quotients of fractions, and solve
word problems involving division of fractions by fractions,
e.g., by using visual fraction models and equations to
represent the problem. For example, create a story
context for (2/3) ÷ (3/4) and use a visual fraction model
to show the quotient; use the relationship between
multiplication and division to explain that (2/3) ÷ (3/4) =
8/9 because 3/4 of 8/9 is 2/3. (In general, (a/b) ÷ (c/d) =
ad/bc.) How much chocolate will each person get if 3
people share 1/2 lb of chocolate equally? How many 3/4cup servings are in 2/3 of a cup of yogurt? How wide is a
rectangular strip of land with length 3/4 mi and area 1/2
square mi?
Compute fluently with multi-digit numbers and find
common factors and multiples.
2. Fluently divide multi-digit numbers using the standard
algorithm.
3. Fluently add, subtract, multiply, and divide multi-digit
decimals using the standard algorithm for each
operation.
4. Find the greatest common factor of two whole numbers
less than or equal to 100 and the least common multiple
of two whole numbers less than or equal to 12. Use the
distributive property to express a sum of two whole
numbers 1–100 with a common factor as a multiple of a
sum of two whole numbers with no common factor. For
example, express 36 + 8 as 4 (9 + 2).
64
Resources
MiF Chapter 3.1-3.4
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
Math Window
MiF Chapter 3.1-3.4
MiF Chapter 5.1-5.2
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 3.1-3.4
MiF 11.1-11.3
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 1.1-1.3
MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
(Distributive property covered in Math Windows)
6.NS
6.NS
6.NS
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
6
Resources
Apply and extend previous understandings of numbers
to the system of rational numbers.
5. Understand that positive and negative numbers are used MiF Chapter 2.1-2.2
together to describe quantities having opposite
directions or values (e.g., temperature above/below
Math Windows
zero, elevation above/below sea level, credits/debits,
positive/negative electric charge); use positive and
negative numbers to represent quantities in real-world
contexts, explaining the meaning of 0 in each situation.
6. Understand a rational number as a point on the number
line. Extend number line diagrams and coordinate axes
familiar from previous grades to represent points on the
line and in the plane with negative number coordinates.
a. Recognize opposite signs of numbers as indicating
MiF Chapter 1.1-1.5
locations on opposite sides of 0 on the number line;
MiF Chapter 2.1-2.2
recognize that the opposite of the opposite of a
MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
number is the number itself, e.g., –(–3) = 3, and that
0 is its own opposite.
Math Windows - opposite signs
b. Understand signs of numbers in ordered pairs as
MiF Chapter 1.1-1.5
indicating locations in quadrants of the coordinate
plane; recognize that when two ordered pairs differ
only by signs, the locations of the points are related
by reflections across one or both axes.
c. Find and position integers and other rational numbers MiF Chapter 1.1-1.5
on a horizontal or vertical number line diagram; find
MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
and position pairs of integers and other rational
numbers on a coordinate plane.
a. Understand ordering and absolute value of rational
numbers.
65
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
6
Resources
a. Interpret statements of inequality as statements
MiF Chapter 1.1-1.5
about the relative position of two numbers on a
MiF Chapter 2.1-2.2
number line diagram. For example, interpret –3 > –7 MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
as a statement that –3 is located to the right of –7 on
Math Windows (absolute value is covered in Windows)
a number line oriented from left to right.
6.NS
b. Write, interpret, and explain statements of order for
rational numbers in real-world contexts. For example,
write –3oC > –7oC to express the fact that –3oC is
warmer than –7oC.
c. Understand the absolute value of a rational number
as its distance from 0 on the number line; interpret
absolute value as magnitude for a positive or
negative quantity in a real-world situation. For
example, for an account balance of –30 dollars, write
|–30| = 30 to describe the size of the debt in dollars.
d. Distinguish comparisons of absolute value from
statements about order. For example, recognize that
an account balance less than –30 dollars represents
a debt greater than 30 dollars.
b. Solve real-world and mathematical problems by
graphing points in all four quadrants of the coordinate
plane. Include use of coordinates and absolute value
to find distances between points with the same first
coordinate or the same second coordinate.
66
MiF Chapter 1.1-1.5
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 2.1-2.2
MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 2.1-2.2
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
Math Windows
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
6.EE
6
1. Write and evaluate numerical expressions involving
whole-number exponents.
Resources
MiF 11.1-11.3
MiF 12.1-12.4
Math Windows
6.EE
2. Write, read, and evaluate expressions in which letters
stand for numbers.
a. Write expressions that record operations with
numbers and with letters standing for numbers. For
example, express the calculation “Subtract y from 5”
as 5 – y.
MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
b. Identify parts of an expression using mathematical
terms (sum, term, product, factor, quotient,
coefficient); view one or more parts of an expression
as a single entity. For example, describe the
expression 2 (8 + 7) as a product of two factors; view
(8 + 7) as both a single entity and a sum of two
terms.
MiF Chapter 7.1-7.5
c. Evaluate expressions at specific values of their
variables. Include expressions that arise from
formulas used in real-world problems. Perform
arithmetic operations, including those involving whole
number exponents, in the conventional order when
there are no parentheses to specify a particular order
(Order of Operations). For example, use the formulas
V = s3 and A = 6 s2 to find the volume and surface
area of a cube with sides of length s = 1/2.
MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
MiF Chapter 10.1-10.4
MiF 11.1-11.3
MiF 12.1-12.4
67
Math Windows
Math Windows
Math Windows
6.EE
6.EE
6.EE
6.EE
6.EE
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
6
3. Apply the properties of operations to generate equivalent MiF Chapter 7.2-7.4
expressions. For example, apply the distributive property
to the expression 3 (2 + x) to produce the equivalent
expression 6 + 3x; apply the distributive property to the
expression 24x + 18y to produce the equivalent
expression 6 (4x + 3y); apply properties of operations to
y + y + y to produce the equivalent expression 3y.
4. Identify when two expressions are equivalent (i.e., when
the two expressions name the same number regardless
of which value is substituted into them). For example,
the expressions y + y + y and 3y are equivalent because
they name the same number regardless of which
number y stands for.
Reason about and solve one-variable equations and
inequalities.
5. Understand solving an equation or inequality as a
process of answering a question: which values from a
specified set, if any, make the equation or inequality
true? Use substitution to determine whether a given
number in a specified set makes an equation or
inequality true.
MiF Chapter 7.3-7.4
MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
Math Windows
6. Use variables to represent numbers and write
expressions when solving a real-world or mathematical
problem; understand that a variable can represent an
unknown number, or, depending on the purpose at
hand, any number in a specified set.
MiF Chapter 7.5
MiF Chapter 8.1
7. Solve real-world and mathematical problems by writing
and solving equations of the form x + p = q and px = q
for cases in which p, q and x are all nonnegative rational
numbers.
MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
68
Math Windows
Resources
6.EE
6.EE
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
6
8. Write an inequality of the form x > c or x < c to represent MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
a constraint or condition in a real-world or mathematical
problem. Recognize that inequalities of the form x > c or
x < c have infinitely many solutions; represent solutions
of such inequalities on number line diagrams.
Represent and analyze quantitative relationships
between dependent and independent variables.
9. Use variables to represent two quantities in a real-world MiF Chapter 8.1-8.4
problem that change in relationship to one another; write
an equation to express one quantity, thought of as the
dependent variable, in terms of the other quantity,
thought of as the independent variable. Analyze the
relationship between the dependent and independent
variables using graphs and tables, and relate these to
the equation. For example, in a problem involving motion
at constant speed, list and graph ordered pairs of
distances and times, and write the equation d = 65t to
represent the relationship between distance and time.
69
Resources
GEOMETRY
6.G
6
Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving
area, surface area, and volume.
1. Find the area of right triangles, other triangles, special
quadrilaterals, and polygons by composing into
rectangles or decomposing into triangles and other
shapes; apply these techniques in the context of solving
real-world and mathematical problems.
Resources
MiF Chapter 10.1-10.4
Math Windows
6.G
2. Find the volume of a right rectangular prism with
MiF 12.1-12.4
fractional edge lengths by packing it with unit cubes of
the appropriate unit fraction edge lengths, and show that Math Windows (volume of cube, prisms)
the volume is the same as would be found by multiplying
the edge lengths of the prism. Apply the formulas V = l w
h and V = b h to find volumes of right rectangular prisms
with fractional edge lengths in the context of solving realworld and mathematical problems.
6.G
3. Draw polygons in the coordinate plane given coordinates MiF Chapter 9.1-9.3
for the vertices; use coordinates to find the length of a
MiF Chapter 10.1-10.4
side joining points with the same first coordinate or the
same second coordinate. Apply these techniques in the
Math Windows
context of solving real-world and mathematical
problems.
6.G
4. Represent three-dimensional figures using nets made up MiF 12.1-12.4
of rectangles and triangles, and use the nets to find the
surface area of these figures. Apply these techniques in Math Windows
the context of solving real-world and mathematical
problems.
70
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
6.SP
6.SP
6.SP
6.SP
6.SP
6
Develop understanding of statistical variability.
1. Recognize a statistical question as one that anticipates
variability in the data related to the question and
accounts for it in the answers. For example, “How old
am I?” is not a statistical question, but “How old are the
students in my school?” is a statistical question because
one anticipates variability in students’ ages.
2. Understand that a set of data collected to answer a
statistical question has a distribution which can be
described by its center, spread, and overall shape.
3. Recognize that a measure of center for a numerical data
set summarizes all of its values with a single number,
while a measure of variation describes how its values
vary with a single number.
Summarize and describe distributions.
4. Display numerical data in plots on a number line,
including dot plots, histograms, and box plots.
5. Summarize numerical data sets in relation to their
context, such as by:
a. Reporting the number of observations.
b. Describing the nature of the attribute under
investigation, including how it was measured and its
units of measurement.
c. Giving quantitative measures of center (median
and/or mean) and variability (interquartile range
and/or mean absolute deviation), as well as
describing any overall pattern and any striking
deviations from the overall pattern with reference to
the context in which the data were gathered.
71
Resources
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
Math Windows (on shape of data)
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
Math Windows
MiF Chapter 13.1-13.3
Math Windows cover interquartile range and deviations
(standard/absolute)
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
6
Resources
d. Relating the choice of measures of center and
MiF Chapter 14.1-14.4
variability to the shape of the data distribution and
the context in which the data were gathered.
72
Grade 7
Standards and Expectations
7.RP
7.RP
7.RP
RATIOS AND PROPORTIONAL RELATIONSHIPS
7
Resources
Analyze proportional relationships and use them to
solve real-world and mathematical problems.
1. Compute unit rates associated with ratios of fractions,
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 5, 5.1 RPK
including ratios of lengths, areas and other quantities
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 7.5
measured in like or different units. For example, if a
person walks 1/2 mile in each 1/4 hour, compute the unit
rate as the complex fraction 1/2/1/4 miles per hour,
equivalently 2 miles per hour.
2. Recognize and represent proportional relationships
between quantities.
a. Decide whether two quantities are in a proportional
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 5
relationship, e.g., by testing for equivalent ratios in a
table or graphing on a coordinate plane and
observing whether the graph is a straight line through
the origin.
b. Identify the constant of proportionality (unit rate) in
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 5.1-2, 5.4
tables, graphs, equations, diagrams, and verbal
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 7.5
descriptions of proportional relationships.
c. Represent proportional relationships by equations.
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 5
For example, if total cost t is proportional to the
number n of items purchased at a constant price p,
the relationship between the total cost and the
number of items can be expressed as t = pn.
d. Explain what a point (x, y) on the graph of a
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 5.1-2, 5.4
proportional relationship means in terms of the
situation, with special attention to the points (0, 0)
and (1, r) where r is the unit rate.
3. Use proportional relationships to solve multistep ratio
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.6, 3.6-7, 5.3-4
and percent problems. Examples: simple interest, tax,
MiF Course 2, Book B, 6.1-2, 7.5, 10.2-3
markups and markdowns, gratuities and commissions,
fees, percent increase and decrease, percent error.
73
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
7.NS
7.NS
7
Apply and extend previous understandings of
operations with fractions to add, subtract, multiply, and
divide rational numbers.
1. 1. Apply and extend previous understandings of addition
and subtraction to add and subtract rational numbers;
represent addition and subtraction on a horizontal or
vertical number line diagram.
a. Describe situations in which opposite quantities
combine to make 0. For example, a hydrogen atom
has 0 charge because its two constituents are
oppositely charged.
b. Understand p + q as the number located a distance
|q| from p, in the positive or negative direction
depending on whether q is positive or negative. Show
that a number and its opposite have a sum of 0 (are
additive inverses). Interpret sums of rational numbers
by describing real-world contexts.
c. Understand subtraction of rational numbers as
adding the additive inverse, p – q = p + (–q). Show
that the distance between two rational numbers on
the number line is the absolute value of their
difference, and apply this principle in real-world
contexts.
d. Apply properties of operations as strategies to add
and subtract rational numbers.
2. Apply and extend previous understandings of
multiplication and division and of fractions to multiply and
divide rational numbers.
74
Resources
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.1-2, 2.5-6
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.1-2, 2.4
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.1, 2.5-6
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.2-6
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.1-2, 2.4-5
7.NS
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
7
Resources
a. Understand that multiplication is extended from
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.3-5
fractions to rational numbers by requiring that
operations continue to satisfy the properties of
operations, particularly the distributive property,
leading to products such as (–1)(–1) = 1 and the
rules for multiplying signed numbers. Interpret
products of rational numbers by describing real-world
contexts.
b. Understand that integers can be divided, provided
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2.3, 2.5, 4.2
that the divisor is not zero, and every quotient of
integers (with non-zero divisor) is a rational number.
If p and q are integers, then –(p/q) = (–p)/q = p/(–q).
Interpret quotients of rational numbers by describing
real world contexts.
c. Apply properties of operations as strategies to
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 2
multiply and divide rational numbers.
d. Convert a rational number to a decimal using long
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 1.2
division; know that the decimal form of a rational
number terminates in 0s or eventually repeats.
3. Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 1.5, 2.1, 2.3, 2.6, 3.7, 4.3,
the four operations with rational numbers.
4.4, 4.5
75
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
7.EE
7.EE
7.EE
7.EE
7
Use properties of operations to generate equivalent
expressions.
1. Apply properties of operations as strategies to add,
subtract, factor, and expand linear expressions with
rational coefficients.
2. Understand that rewriting an expression in different
forms in a problem context can shed light on the
problem and how the quantities in it are related. For
example, a + 0.05a = 1.05a means that “increase by
5%” is the same as “multiply by 1.05.”
Solve real-life and mathematical problems using
numerical and algebraic expressions and equations.
3. Solve multi-step real-life and mathematical problems
posed with positive and negative rational numbers in any
form (whole numbers, fractions, and decimals), using
tools strategically. Apply properties of operations to
calculate with numbers in any form; convert between
forms as appropriate; and assess the reasonableness of
answers using mental computation and estimation
strategies. For example: If a woman making $25 an hour
gets a 10% raise, she will make an additional 1/10 of her
salary an hour, or $2.50, for a new salary of $27.50. If
you want to place a towel bar 9 3/4 inches long in the
center of a door that is 27 1/2 inches wide, you will need
to place the bar about 9 inches from each edge; this
estimate can be used as a check on the exact
computation.
4. Use variables to represent quantities in a real-world or
mathematical problem, and construct simple equations
and inequalities to solve problems by reasoning about
the quantities.
76
Resources
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 3, 4.1
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 3.6-7, 4.1, 4.3
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 1.2-5, Chapter 2, Chapter 3,
Chapter 4
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 3.6, Chapter 4
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
7
Resources
a. Solve word problems leading to equations of the form MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 3
px + q = r and p(x + q) = r, where p, q, and r are
specific rational numbers. Solve equations of these
forms fluently. Compare an algebraic solution to an
arithmetic solution, identifying the sequence of the
operations used in each approach. For example, the
perimeter of a rectangle is 54 cm. Its length is 6 cm.
What is its width?
b. Solve word problems leading to inequalities of the
MiF Course 2, Book A, Chapter 4, Chapter 9.1-5
form px + q > r or px + q < r, where p, q, and r are
specific rational numbers. Graph the solution set of
the inequality and interpret it in the context of the
problem. For example: As a salesperson, you are
paid $50 per week plus $3 per sale. This week you
want your pay to be at least $100. Write an inequality
for the number of sales you need to make, and
describe the solutions.
77
GEOMETRY
7.G
7.G
7.G
7.G
7.G
7.G
7
Draw, construct, and describe geometrical figures and
describe the relationships between them.
1. Solve problems involving scale drawings of geometric
figures, including computing actual lengths and areas
from a scale drawing and reproducing a scale drawing at
a different scale.
2. Draw (freehand, with ruler and protractor, and with
technology) geometric shapes with given conditions.
Focus on constructing triangles from three measures of
angles or sides, noticing when the conditions determine
a unique triangle, more than one triangle, or no triangle.
3. Describe the two-dimensional figures that result from
slicing three-dimensional figures, as in plane sections of
right rectangular prisms and right rectangular pyramids.
Solve real-life and mathematical problems involving
angle measure, area, surface area, and volume.
4. Know the formulas for the area and circumference of a
circle and use them to solve problems; give an informal
derivation of the relationship between the circumference
and area of a circle.
5. Use facts about supplementary, complementary,
vertical, and adjacent angles in a multi-step problem to
write and solve simple equations for an unknown angle
in a figure.
6. Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving
area, volume and surface area of two- and threedimensional objects composed of triangles,
quadrilaterals, polygons, cubes, and right prisms.
78
Resources
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 7.5
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 7.1-4
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 8.1
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 8.2-3
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 6.1-4
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 7.5, Chapter 8.1-5
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
7.SP
7.SP
7.SP
7
Resources
Use random sampling to draw inferences about a
population.
1. Understand that statistics can be used to gain
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 9.4
information about a population by examining a sample of
the population; generalizations about a population from
a sample are valid only if the sample is representative of
that population. Understand that random sampling tends
to produce representative samples and support valid
inferences.
2. Use data from a random sample to draw inferences
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 9.4-5
about a population with an unknown characteristic of
interest. Generate multiple samples (or simulated
samples) of the same size to gauge the variation in
estimates or predictions. For example, estimate the
mean word length in a book by randomly sampling
words from the book; predict the winner of a school
election based on randomly sampled survey data.
Gauge how far off the estimate or prediction might be.
Draw informal comparative inferences about two
populations.
3. Informally assess the degree of visual overlap of two
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 9.1-3, 9.5
numerical data distributions with similar variabilities,
measuring the difference between the centers by
expressing it as a multiple of a measure of variability.
For example, the mean height of players on the
basketball team is 10 cm greater than the mean height
of players on the soccer team, about twice the variability
(mean absolute deviation) on either team; on a dot plot,
the separation between the two distributions of heights is
noticeable.
79
7.SP
7.SP
7.SP
7.SP
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
7
Resources
4. Use measures of center and measures of variability for
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 9.1-3
numerical data from random samples to draw informal
comparative inferences about two populations. For
example, decide whether the words in a chapter of a
seventh-grade science book are generally longer than
the words in a chapter of a fourth-grade science book.
Investigate chance processes and develop, use, and
evaluate probability models.
5. Understand that the probability of a chance event is a
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.2
number between 0 and 1 that expresses the likelihood of
the event occurring. Larger numbers indicate greater
likelihood. A probability near 0 indicates an unlikely
event, a probability around 1/2 indicates an event that is
neither unlikely nor likely, and a probability near 1
indicates a likely event.
6. Approximate the probability of a chance event by
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.2-3
collecting data on the chance process that produces it
and observing its long-run relative frequency, and
predict the approximate relative frequency given the
probability. For example, when rolling a number cube
600 times, predict that a 3 or 6 would be rolled roughly
200 times, but probably not exactly 200 times.
7. Develop a probability model and use it to find
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.4
probabilities of events. Compare probabilities from a
model to observed frequencies; if the agreement is not
good, explain possible sources of the discrepancy.
a. Develop a uniform probability model by assigning
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.4
equal probability to all outcomes, and use the model
to determine probabilities of events. For example, if a
student is selected at random from a class, find the
probability that Jane will be selected and the
probability that a girl will be selected.
80
7.SP
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
7
Resources
b. Develop a probability model (which may not be
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.4
uniform) by observing frequencies in data generated
from a chance process. For example, find the
approximate probability that a spinning penny will
land heads up or that a tossed paper cup will land
open-end down. Do the outcomes for the spinning
penny appear to be equally likely based on the
observed frequencies?
8. Find probabilities of compound events using organized
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.1
lists, tables, tree diagrams, and simulation.
a. Understand that, just as with simple events, the
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.2
probability of a compound event is the fraction of
outcomes in the sample space for which the
compound event occurs.
b. Represent sample spaces for compound events
MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.2
using methods such as organized lists, tables and
tree diagrams. For an event described in everyday
language (e.g., “rolling double sixes”), identify the
outcomes in the sample space which compose the
event.
c. Design and use a simulation to generate frequencies MiF Course 2, Book B, Chapter 10.4
for compound events. For example, use random
digits as a simulation tool to approximate the answer
to the question: If 40% of donors have type A blood,
what is the probability that it will take at least 4
donors to find one with type A blood?
81
Grade 8
Standards and Expectations
THE NUMBER SYSTEM
8.NS
8.NS
8
Know that there are numbers that are not rational, and
approximate them by rational numbers.
1. Understand informally that every number has a decimal
expansion; the rational numbers are those with decimal
expansions that terminate in 0s or eventually repeat.
Know that other numbers are called irrational.
2. Use rational approximations of irrational numbers to
compare the size of irrational numbers, locate them
approximately on a number line diagram, and estimate
the value of expressions (e.g., π2). For example, by
truncating the decimal expansion of √2, show that √2 is
between 1 and 2, then between 1.4 and 1.5, and explain
how to continue on to get better approximations.
82
Resources
MiF 3A Chapter 1 (Recall Prior Knowledge {RPK})
Chapter 3 (RPK)
Chapter 3.1
MiF 3A Chapter 1 RPK
Chapter 1.6
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
8.EE
8.EE
8.EE
8.EE
8.EE
8
Work with radicals and integer exponents.
1. Know and apply the properties of integer exponents to
generate equivalent numerical expressions. For
example, 32 × 3–5 = 3–3 = 1/33 = 1/27.
2. Use square root and cube root symbols to represent
solutions to equations of the form x2 = p and x3 = p,
where p is a positive rational number. Evaluate square
roots of small perfect squares and cube roots of small
perfect cubes. Know that √2 is irrational.
3. Use numbers expressed in the form of a single digit
times an integer power of 10 to estimate very large or
very small quantities, and to express how many times as
much one is than the other. For example, estimate the
population of the United States as 3 × 108 and the
population of the world as 7 × 109, and determine that
the world population is more than 20 times larger.
4. Perform operations with numbers expressed in scientific
notation, including problems where both decimal and
scientific notation are used. Use scientific notation and
choose units of appropriate size for measurements of
very large or very small quantities (e.g., use millimeters
per year for seafloor spreading). Interpret scientific
notation that has been generated by technology.
Understand the connections between proportional
relationships, lines, and linear equations.
5. Graph proportional relationships, interpreting the unit
rate as the slope of the graph. Compare two different
proportional relationships represented in different ways.
For example, compare a distance-time graph to a
distance-time equation to determine which of two
moving objects has greater speed.
83
Resources
MiF 3A Chapter 1 {RPK}
MiF 3A Chapter 1.1-1.6
MiF 3A Chapter 1 {RPK}
MiF 3A Chapter 1.6
MiF 3B Chapter 7.3
MiF 3B Chapter 7.4
MiF 3A Chapter 2 {RPK}
MiF 3A Chapter 2.1
MiF 3A Chapter 2.3
MiF 3A Chapter 2.2
MiF 3A Chapter 2.3
MiF 3A Chapter 3 {RPK}
MiF 3A Chapter 3.3, 3.4
MiF 3A Chapter 4 {RPK}
MiF 3A Chapter 4.1, 4.4, 4.5
MiF 3A Chapter 5 {RPK}
8.EE
8.EE
8.EE
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
8
Resources
6. Use similar triangles to explain why the slope m is the
MiF 3A Chapter 4.1-4.4
same between any two distinct points on a non-vertical
line in the coordinate plane; derive the equation y = mx
for a line through the origin and the equation y = mx + b
for a line intercepting the vertical axis at b.
Analyze and solve linear equations and pairs of
simultaneous linear equations.
7. Solve linear equations in one variable.
a. Give examples of linear equations in one variable
MiF 3A Chapter 3 {RPK}
with one solution, infinitely many solutions, or no
MiF 3A Chapter 3.1, 3.2
solutions. Show which of these possibilities is the
case by successively transforming the given equation
into simpler forms, until an equivalent equation of the
form x = a, a = a, or a = b results (where a and b are
different numbers).
b. Solve linear equations with rational number
MiF 3A Chapter 3 {RPK}
coefficients, including equations whose solutions
MiF 3A Chapter 3.1, 3.2
require expanding expressions using the distributive
property and collecting like terms.
8. Analyze and solve pairs of simultaneous linear
equations.
a. Understand that solutions to a system of two linear
MiF 3A Chapter 5.1, 5.4
equations in two variables correspond to points of
intersection of their graphs, because points of
intersection satisfy both equations simultaneously.
b. Solve systems of two linear equations in two
MiF 3A Chapter 5.2
variables algebraically, and estimate solutions by
graphing the equations. Solve simple cases by
inspection. For example, 3x + 2y = 5 and 3x + 2y = 6
have no solution because 3x + 2y cannot
simultaneously be 5 and 6.
84
EXPRESSIONS AND EQUATIONS
8
c. Solve real-world and mathematical problems leading MiF 3A Chapter 5.3
to two linear equations in two variables. For example,
given coordinates for two pairs of points, determine
whether the line through the first pair of points
intersects the line through the second pair.
85
Resources
FUNCTIONS
8.F
8.F
8.F
8.F
8.F
8
Define, evaluate, and compare functions.
1. Understand that a function is a rule that assigns to each
input exactly one output. The graph of a function is the
set of ordered pairs consisting of an input and the
corresponding output.1
2. Compare properties of two functions each represented
in a different way (algebraically, graphically, numerically
in tables, or by verbal descriptions). For example, given
a linear function represented by a table of values and a
linear function represented by an algebraic expression,
determine which function has the greater rate of change.
3. Interpret the equation y = mx + b as defining a linear
function, whose graph is a straight line; give examples of
functions that are not linear. For example, the function A
= s2 giving the area of a square as a function of its side
length is not linear because its graph contains the points
(1,1), (2,4) and (3,9), which are not on a straight line.
Use functions to model relationships between
quantities.
4. Construct a function to model a linear relationship
between two quantities. Determine the rate of change
and initial value of the function from a description of a
relationship or from two (x, y) values, including reading
these from a table or from a graph. Interpret the rate of
change and initial value of a linear function in terms of
the situation it models, and in terms of its graph or a
table of values.
5. Describe qualitatively the functional relationship between
two quantities by analyzing a graph (e.g., where the
function is increasing or decreasing, linear or nonlinear).
Sketch a graph that exhibits the qualitative features of a
function that has been described verbally.
1
Function notation is not required in Grade 8.
86
Resources
MiF 3A Chapter 6.1, 6.2
MiF 3A Chapter 6.4
MiF 3A Chapter 4.2
MiF 3A Chapter 6.3
MiF 3B Chapter 10.2 (line of best fit)
MiF 3A Chapter 6.2
MiF 3A Chapter 6.3
MiF 3B Chapter 10.2
GEOMETRY
8.G
8
Understand congruence and similarity using physical
models, transparencies, or geometry software.
1. Verify experimentally the properties of rotations,
reflections, and translations.
Resources
a. Lines are taken to lines, and line segments to line
segments of the same length.
MiF 3B Chapter 8.1-8.3
b. Angles are taken to angles of the same measure.
MiF 3B Chapter 8.1-8.3
c. Parallel lines are taken to parallel lines.
MiF 3B Chapter 8.1-8.3
8.G
2. Understand that a two-dimensional figure is congruent to
another if the second can be obtained from the first by a
sequence of rotations, reflections, and translations;
given two congruent figures, describe a sequence that
exhibits the congruence between them.
MiF 3B Chapter 9.1, 9.3
8.G
3. Describe the effect of dilations, translations, rotations,
and reflections on two-dimensional figures using
coordinates.
MiF 3B Chapter 8
8.G
4. Understand that a two-dimensional figure is similar to
MiF 3B Chapter 9.3
another if the second can be obtained from the first by a
sequence of rotations, reflections, translations, and
dilations; given two similar two-dimensional figures,
describe a sequence that exhibits the similarity between
them.
5. Use informal arguments to establish facts about the
MiF 3B Chapter 9 {RPK}
angle sum and exterior angle of triangles, about the
angles created when parallel lines are cut by a
transversal, and the angle-angle criterion for similarity of
triangles. For example, arrange three copies of the same
triangle so that the sum of the three angles appears to
form a line, and give an argument in terms of
transversals why this is so.
8.G
87
8.G
GEOMETRY
8
Understand and apply the Pythagorean Theorem.
6. Explain a proof of the Pythagorean Theorem and its
MiF 3B Chapter 7.1
converse.
8.G
7. Apply the Pythagorean Theorem to determine unknown
side lengths in right triangles in real-world and
mathematical problems in two and three dimensions.
MiF 3B Chapter 7.3, 7.4
8.G
8. Apply the Pythagorean Theorem to find the distance
between two points in a coordinate system.
MiF 3B Chapter 7.2
8.G
Solve real-world and mathematical problems involving
volume of cylinders, cones, and spheres.
9. Know the formulas for the volumes of cones, cylinders,
and spheres and use them to solve real-world and
mathematical problems.
88
Resources
MiF 3B Chapter 7 {RPK}
MiF 3B Chapter 7.3, 7.4
STATISTICS AND PROBABILITY
8.SP
8
Investigate patterns of association in bivariate data.
1. Construct and interpret scatter plots for bivariate
measurement data to investigate patterns of association
between two quantities. Describe patterns such as
clustering, outliers, positive or negative association,
linear association, and nonlinear association.
Resources
MiF 3B Chapter 10.1
8.SP
2. Know that straight lines are widely used to model
relationships between two quantitative variables. For
scatter plots that suggest a linear association, informally
fit a straight line, and informally assess the model fit by
judging the closeness of the data points to the line.
MiF 3A Chapter 4.4, 6.2
MiF 3B Chapter 10.2
8.SP
3. Use the equation of a linear model to solve problems in
the context of bivariate measurement data, interpreting
the slope and intercept. For example, in a linear model
for a biology experiment, interpret a slope of 1.5 cm/hr
as meaning that an additional hour of sunlight each day
is associated with an additional 1.5 cm in mature plant
height.
MiF 3A Chapter 6.2
MiF 3B Chapter 10.2
8.SP
4. Understand that patterns of association can also be
seen in bivariate categorical data by displaying
frequencies and relative frequencies in a two-way table.
Construct and interpret a two-way table summarizing
data on two categorical variables collected from the
same subjects. Use relative frequencies calculated for
rows or columns to describe possible association
between the two variables. For example, collect data
from students in your class on whether or not they have
a curfew on school nights and whether or not they have
assigned chores at home. Is there evidence that those
who have a curfew also tend to have chores?
MiF 3B Chapter 10.3
89
BALANCED MATH PROGRAM OVERVIEW
90
Overview of Balanced Mathematics Program
Concepts
Computation
-Conceptual understanding
-Proficiency with math skills, facts
and procedures
(making sense of math)
+
(doing math)
91
Problem Solving
+
(using math)
PACING GUIDES AND
OVERVIEW OF MATHEMATICS CHAPTERS
92
Math Pacing Guide: Grades K-2
Kindergarten
Grade 1
Grade 2
New Unit: Calendar and
Investigations
Chapter 1: Numbers to 5
Chapter 11: Calendar
Patterns
Chapter 13: Patterns
Chapter 1: Numbers to 10
Chapter 2: Number Bonds
Chapter 15: Calendar and
Time
Chapter 1: Numbers to
1,000
October
Chapter 2: Numbers to 10
Chapter 3: Order by Size,
Length, or Weight
Chapter 16: Classifying and
Sorting
Chapter 3: Addition Facts to
10
Chapter 4: Subtraction
Facts to 10
Chapter 10: Mental Math
and Estimation
Chapter 2: Addition up to
1,000
November
Chapter 4: Counting and
Numbers 0 to 10
Chapter 5: Size and Position
September
Chapter 5: Shapes and
Patterns
Chapter 6: Ordinal
Numbers and Position
December
January
Chapter 6: Numbers 0 to 20
Chapter 15: Length and
Height
Chapter 7: Solid and Flat
Shapes
Chapter 10: Ordinal
Numbers
Chapter 7: Numbers to 20
Chapter 8: Addition and
Subtraction Facts to 20
Chapter 9: Length
Chapter 3: Subtraction up
to 1,000
Chapter 4: Using Bar
Models, Addition and
Subtraction
Chapter 5: Multiplication
and Division
Chapter 6: Multiplication
Tables of 2, 5 and 10
Chapter 7: Metric
Measurements of Length
Chapter 8: Mass
Chapter 8: Numbers to 100
February
Chapter 9: Comparing Sets
Chapter 19: Measurement
Chapter 12: Counting On
and Counting Back
March
Chapter 14: Number Facts
April
Chapter 9: Volume
Chapter 11: Picture Graphs
and Bar Graphs
Chapter 12: Numbers to 40
Chapter 11: Money
Chapter 12 (cont’d.):
Numbers to 40
Chapter 13: Addition and
Subtraction to 40
Chapter 12: Fractions
Chapter 13: Customary
Measurement of Length
Chapter 14: Time
Chapter 14: Mental Math
Strategies
Chapter 16: Numbers to
100
Chapter 15: Multiplication
Tables of 3 and 4
Chapter 16: Using Bar
Models: Multiplication and
Division
Chapter 17: Addition and
Chapter 17: Picture Graphs
Subtraction to 100
Chapter 18: Lines and
Chapter 18: Multiplication
Surfaces
May/June
and Division
Chapter 19: Shapes and
Chapter 19: Money
Patterns
The above timeline is to be used as a guideline to provide a “snapshot” of the year at a glance.
Chapter 17: Addition
Stories
Chapter 18: Subtraction
Stories
Kindergarten & First only: Italics = Integrated Chapters
93
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades K-2
94
New Unit Overview – Calendar and Investigations
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~September (10 days)
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, an active learning environment is
established in which students build their mathematical knowledge while working with the
teacher and their classmates. Routines are being simultaneously introduced as children
are exploring numbers, days of the week, months of the year, seasons, weather, ordinal
numbers, patterns, geometry, measurement and money. In addition, the children will
investigate various patterns and number amounts as they explore manipulatives: unifix
cubes, teddy bear counters, links, jewels, buttons, pattern blocks, etc …
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How does a calendar work?
 Number fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
 How does understanding of number
appropriately use numbers.
sense, measurement, geometry,
patterns and money relate to daily
 Patterns and relationships can be
routines such as calendar and weather?
represented graphically, symbolically,
and verbally.
 How are manipulatives used for
counting, sorting, and creating
 Various elements are incorporated into
patterns?
a calendar such as days, months,
seasons, and ordinal numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 numbers 1-31
 longer
 count
 shorter
 ordinal numbers  length
 days of the week  height
 today
 weight
 tomorrow
 heavier
 yesterday
 lighter
 weekend
 size
 weekday
 less
 months of the
 more
year
 same
 seasons
 before
 weather
 after
 pattern
 next
 sort
 time
 extend
 hour
 money (penny)
 minute hand
 hour hand
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.5
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
K.MD.3
K.G.1
K-12.MP.1
K-12.MP.2
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.6
K-12.MP.7
K-12.MP.8
95
Chapter 1 Overview – Numbers to 5
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~15 days, September
through Mid October
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children investigate how to sort objects
using one attribute. They look for sameness and differences with such attributes as
size, number, and color. The sorting activities are closely connected to the numerals
and quantities 1 through 5. Children also learn to read and write numerals 1 to 5.
Essential Questions:
 How does understanding 1-to-1
correspondence support counting up to
5 objects?
 What is the relationship between the
number of objects and their respective
numerals?
 What attributes of objects are the same
and different?
Enduring Understandings:
 Count groups of up to 5 objects by
using one-to-one correspondence. .
 Identify same and different attributes of
objects such as color, size, and shape.
 Match same size sets up to 5.
Key Words/Terminology:
 one
 two
 three
 four
 five
 same
 different
 not the same
 tall
 blue
 red
 green
 yellow
 black
 white
 big
 small
 long
 short
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.5
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
K-12.MP.2
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.6
K-12.MP.7
96
Chapter 2 Overview – Numbers to 10
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~17 days, end of
October-November
Brief Description of Chapter: This chapter includes a variety of matching activities in
which children find two groups that have the same number of objects. These activities
provide practice and reinforcement with counting while developing a visual meaning of
number.
Essential Questions:
 How does understanding one-to-one
correspondence support counting 0 to 9
objects?
 What is the relationship between the
number of objects and their respective
numerals?
 How do you compare two sets of
objects to determine if there is a
difference of one more, one less, or the
same number of objects?
Enduring Understandings:
 Count groups of up to 9 objects by
using one-to-one correspondence. .
 Match same size sets up to 9.
 Compare two sets of objects to
determine sets of more, less or the
same.
Key Words/Terminology:
 six
 seven
 eight
 nine
 zero
 one more
 one less
 the same number
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.5
K.CC.6
K.CC.7
K-12.MP.1
K-12.MP.2
K-12.MP.3
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.7
97
Chapter 3 Overview – Order by Size, Length, or Weight
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~ Incorporated into
calendar routines
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children begin using non-standard units
to measure, laying the foundation for the use of standard units in later grades. Children
begin by touching, examining, and comparing objects to develop awareness of
attributes, such as length, size, and weight.
Essential Questions:
 How are objects compared and
ordered?
 What type of language is used to
describe differences between objects
when comparing their size, length, and
weight?
Enduring Understandings:
 Order objects according to size, length
and weight.
 Use comparative vocabulary.
Key Words/Terminology:
 same size
 different size
 biggest
 middle sized
 smallest
 bigger than
 taller than
 smaller than
 shorter than
 longest
 shortest
 heaviest
 lightest
 heavier
 lighter
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
K.MD.3
K-12.MP.2
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.7
98
Chapter 4 Overview – Counting and Numbers 0 to 10
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~16 days, November
into December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children count up to ten and down from
ten. Counting with 1-to-1 correspondence is features throughout. Counting can be
used to compare and order numbers and quantities. Basic ideas of addition and
subtraction are introduced concretely. Children combine and take away objects, and
then count to find the result.
Essential Questions:
 How are numbers through 5 composed
and decomposed?
 How are numerals and sets up to 20
compared?
 What is the process for combining two
sets together?
Enduring Understandings:
 Order numbers 0 through 10.
 Develop the concept that greater
numbers can be broken up into lesser
numbers.
 Develop the concept that lesser
numbers are combined to form a
greater number.
Key Words/Terminology:
 one more
 one less
 fewer
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.5
K.OA.1
K.OA.3
K-12.MP.1
K-12.MP.2
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.6
K-12.MP.7
99
Chapter 5 Overview – Size and Position
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Incorporated into
calendar routines
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children begin comparing the sizes of
objects: smaller, bigger, or the same size. Children also begin identifying objects that
are on top of, under, next to, behind, in front of, and inside other objects.
Essential Questions:
 How can estimation be used when
determining an appropriate size
container for a group of objects?
 What positional words are used to
describe the location of an object?
 What kind of vocabulary should be
used when ordering events?
Enduring Understandings:
 Explore the idea that only a few big
objects fit into small spaces and many
small objects fit into big spaces.
 Identify positions of objects in space.
 Use appropriate positional language to
describe and compare.
Key Words/Terminology:
 big
 bigger
 small
 smaller
 same size
 on top of
 under
 next to
 behind
 between
 beside
 in front of
 in back of
 inside
 outside
 before
 after
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.5
K.OA.1
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
K.MD.3
K.G.1
K-12.MP.4
K-12.MP.5
K-12.MP.7
100
Chapter 6 Overview – Numbers 0 to 20
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~11 days, January
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children continue to develop one-to-one
correspondence by pointing to each object and saying the number word. Children
should understand that each number that they say is one more than the number before
it. This leads to an understanding of one more and one less. In addition, the last
number named in a sequence is the total of the group of objects.
Essential Questions:
 How does understanding one-to-one
correspondence support counting to
20?
 What are some ways to effectively
compare and sequence numbers to 20?
Enduring Understandings:
 Build on concept of one more by using
ten-frames.
 Count, order, and compare groups of
up to 20 objects.
 Develop an understanding of how to
form numbers to 20.
Key Words/Terminology:
 ten
 eleven
 twelve
 thirteen
 fourteen
 fifteen
 sixteen
 seventeen
 eighteen
 nineteen
 twenty
 more
 fewer
 greater than
 less than
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.2
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.5
K.CC.6
K.CC.7
K.OA.1
K.OA.4
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.12.MP.7
101
Chapter 7 Overview – Solid and Flat Shapes
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~10 days, end of
January
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children are taught more precise names
for shapes and they learn to describe them. Many concrete examples of flat and solid
shapes are provided to help children make real-world connections. They should be able
to identify examples and non-examples of different shapes.
Essential Questions:
 How can the number of faces, corners,
and edges support recognition and
identification of flat and solid shapes?
 How do patterns work?
Enduring Understandings:
 Recognize and describe basic solid
and flat shapes.
 Recognize the relationship between
solid shapes and flat shapes.
 Identify and extend a shape pattern.
Key Words/Terminology:
 face
 edge
 corner
 big small
 shape pattern
 cube
 cone
 cylinder
 sphere
 pyramid
 circle
 triangle
 square
 rectangle
 hexagon
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.3
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.G.2
K.G.3
K.G.4
K.G.5
K.G.6
102
Chapter 8 Overview – Numbers to 100
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Integrated into
calendar routine
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children demonstrate that counting
connects numbers and number words with particular quantities and objects. Skipcounting is a shorter way to count objects since the objects are grouped in twos and
fives. Teachers can relate skip-counting to the operation of addition. Skip-counting
also relates to the algebraic concept of understanding and extending patterns.
Essential Questions:
 How can patterns be used to count to a
designated number?
 What number comes next when
counting numbers 0 to 100?
Enduring Understandings:
 Use pairs to practice counting by 2s to
count up to 20 objects.
 Use tallies to count by 5s up to 20.
 Count by 10s up to 100.
 Count by 1’s to 100.
Key Words/Terminology:
 pairs
 twos
 fives
 tally
 ten
 twenty
 thirty
 forty
 fifty
 sixty
 seventy
 eighty
 ninety
 hundred
 tens

Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.5
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.8
103
Chapter 9 Overview – Comparing Sets
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~9 days, February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to compare sets of up to
20 to find the difference between the two sets. They also learn to compare countable
sets using the terms fewer and more, and uncountable sets using the terms less and
more.
Essential Questions:
 How can sets of objects be compared?
 What kind of language is used when
comparing sets of objects?
 What happens when two sets of objects
are combined?
Enduring Understandings:
 Compare sets of up to 20 objects.
 Count the difference through
comparing sets using one-to-one
correspondence.
 Understand fewer, less, and more.
Key Words/Terminology:
 fewer
 less
 more
 most
 fewest
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.6
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.OA.5
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
104
Chapter 10 Overview – Ordinal Numbers
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~6 days, February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter children will learn to order 3- and 4- step
events using the terms first, next, last, second, and third. Children will learn to order
physical position using ordinal numbers. Children will relate the ordering of objects and
events to the terms before and after.
Essential Questions:
 What type of language is needed when
sequencing events?
 How do the terms ‘before’ and ‘after’
support describing the physical position
of an object?
 How are picture graphs used and
interpreted?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand first, second, third and last
to sequence events.
 Understand before and after in terms
of physical position.
 Make picture graphs based on
preferences.
 Rank preferences using first, second,
and third.
Key Words/Terminology:
 first
 next
 last
 second
 third
 before
 after
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.12.MP.7
105
Chapter 11 Overview – Calendar Patterns
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Integrated into
calendar routines
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children recognize that the seven days
of the week and the twelve months of the year always follow the same order and repeat
continuously. Children should recognize the names of the days of the week and the
months of the year and understand their relationship.
Essential Questions:
 What patterns can be found in the
calendar?
 What is the relationship between the
various elements found on a calendar?
Enduring Understandings:
 Know and order the days of the week
and how many days there are in one
week.
 Understand the concepts of today,
tomorrow, and yesterday.
 Know and order the months of the
year and how many months there are
in one year.
 Make and interpret pictographs.
Key Words/Terminology:
 day
 January
 week
 February
 Sunday
 March
 Monday
 April
 Tuesday
 May
 Wednesday
 June
 Thursday
 July
 Friday
 August
 Saturday
 September
 today
 October
 tomorrow
 November
 yesterday
 December
 month
 warmer
 year
 cooler
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.MD.2
K.MD.3
K.12.MP.5
K.12.MP.7
106
Chapter 12 Overview – Counting On and Counting
Back
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~7 days, March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will count on and count back.
They will learn to find the difference between two sets using various strategies such as
finger counting and 1-to-1 correspondence.
Essential Questions:
 How does counting on and counting
back support finding the difference
between two numbers?
 What other strategies can be used
when determining the difference
between two numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 Count up and back to find the
difference between two sets.
 Count back using fingers and other
representations.
Key Words/Terminology:
 ten
 eleven
 twelve
 thirteen
 fourtenn
 fifteen
 sixteen
 seventeen
 eighteen
 nineteen
 twenty
 more
 fewer
 greater than
 less than
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.5
K.CC.6
K.OA.1
K.OA.3
K.OA.4
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
107
Chapter 13 Overview – Patterns
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Integrated into
calendar
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to create and extend
repeating patterns by identifying the pattern unit and duplicating it. The simple
repeating patterns children create and use in kindergarten provide a basis for
increasingly complex patterns.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How are repeating patterns created and  Recognize, extend, and create a
extended?
repeating pattern.
 Identify a missing portion of a
repeating pattern.
Key Words/Terminology:
 Repeating pattern
 Pattern unit
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.3
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.12.MP.7
K.G.2
108
Chapter 14 Overview – Number Facts
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~10 days, Late
March/Early April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children extend their counting skills
through the number 20. They count and combine groups of objects and they count on
to find differences. Students will practice composing and decomposing numbers, as
well as number bonds, and how they lay the foundation for basic facts, and especially
for missing addends.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How are sets combined and compared?  Compose numbers to 20 with fiveframes and ten-frames.
 How are numbers to 20 composed and
decomposed?
 Decompose numbers to 20 with fiveframes and ten-frames.
 Count on using a number line.
Key Words/Terminology:
N/A
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.2
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.CC.6
K.OA.1
K.OA.3
K.OA.4
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.12.MP.7
K.12.MP.8
NBT.1
109
Chapter 15 Overview – Length and Height
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Integrated into
calendar
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to compare lengths of
objects using the terms long, short, longer, shorter, longest, and shortest. They learn to
compare lengths and heights of objects using non-standard units of measurement, such
as connecting cubes and paper clips.
Essential Questions:
 What type of language is used when
comparing lengths?
 How can the lengths and heights of
objects be compared using
nonstandard units of measurement?
 Are children able to compare lengths
and heights of objects using
nonstandard units of measurement?
Enduring Understandings:
 Use nonstandard units to measure and
compare lengths.
 Find differences in length using
nonstandard units.
 Use nonstandard units to measure and
compare heights.
Key Words/Terminology:
 long
 short
 longer
 shorter
 longest
 shortest
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.3
K.CC.4a
K.CC.4b
K.CC.4c
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.7
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
110
Chapter 16 Overview – Classifying and Sorting
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~Integrated into
calendar
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to identify attributes and
pick out the “odd one out” in a set of objects. Children learn to sort and classify objects
using 1, 2, and 3 attributes.
Essential Questions:
 How can attributes be used to identify
the object in a set of objects that
doesn’t belong?
 How can objects be sorted and
classified using attributes?
Enduring Understandings:
 Classify objects using attributes.
 Identify objects that do not belong in a
set.
 Sort objects by one or two attributes
(color, size, shape, and special
features.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 color
 shape
 size
 pattern
 same
 different
 sort
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.12.MP.7
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
K.MD.3
K.G.2
111
Chapter 17 Overview – Addition Stories
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~5 days, April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to deduce addition
sentences from addition stories and write them using the symbols + and =. Children will
fully familiarize themselves with addition facts to 5.
Essential Questions:
 How can addition stories be used to
formulate addition sentences?
 How are addition sentences written?
 What are strategies for fluently
calculating addition facts to 5?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand addition as the joining of
two sets.
 Understand symbols + and =, and
number sentence.
 Use symbols and numerals to write
number sentences.
 Represent addition stories with
addition sentences.
 Develop fluency with addition facts to
5.
Key Words/Terminology:
 plus
 is equal to
 number sentence
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.3
K.CC.4
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.OA.3
K.OA.5
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
112
Chapter 18 Overview – Subtraction Stories
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~7 days, April/May
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children should be able to understand
simple take-away and comparison subtraction problems. As the story problems are
presented, children use manipulatives and models to make sense of the situations. The
problem situations should also be connected to written numerals in number sentences.
Essential Questions:
 How can subtraction stories be used to
formulate subtraction sentences?
 How are subtraction sentences written?
 How can one-to-one correspondence
be used to compare sets?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand the – (minus) symbol.
 Understand the = (equal) symbol.
 Understand simple subtraction.
 Use symbols and numerals to write
number sentences.
 Represent and write subtraction stories
with subtraction sentences.
 Compare two sets and show the
number sentence to answer how many
more.
Key Words/Terminology:
 minus
 left
 how many more?
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.1
K.CC.3
K.CC.4
K.CC.6
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.OA.3
K.OA.5
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
113
Chapter 19 Overview – Measurement
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: ~6 days, May
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to compare the weights of
objects by using a balance scale. They also learn to compare weights using nonstandard units. Children learn to compare capacities of containers using the terms
holds more, holds less, and holds the same amount.
Essential Questions:
 How can a balance scale or
nonstandard units of measurement be
used to compare the weights of
objects?
 What kind of language is used when
comparing the capacities of different
containers?
Enduring Understandings:
 Compare weights using nonstandard
units and a balance scale.
 Compare containers according to
capacities and use comparative
language.
Key Words/Terminology:
 heavy
 heavier
 light
 lighter
 holds more
 holds less
 holds the same amount
 more time
 less time
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.3
K.CC.2
K.12.MP.1
K.12.MP.2
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
K.MD.1
K.MD.2
114
Chapter 20 Overview – Money
Grade: Kindergarten
Amount of Time: September
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children learn to identify coins by
appearance and value.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How can the appearance and value of a  Recognize penny, nickel, dime, and
coin support identifying it?
quarter.
 How are pennies added?
 Know the value of a penny and a dime.
 Add pennies up to ten.
Key Words/Terminology:
 penny
 nickel
 dime
 quarter
 cent
 change
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
K.CC.2
K.CC.4
K.CC.5
K.OA.1
K.OA.2
K.OA.3
K.12.MP.4
K.12.MP.5
115
Chapter 1 Overview – Numbers to 10
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: September
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will learn how to count, read
and write within 10. Countable items are used to develop the association between the
physical representation of the number, the number symbol and the number-word.
Children are encouraged to compare and verbally describe the sets using the terms
more and less. They will learn to identify and complete growing and reducing number
patterns, where each number in a given sequence is 1 more or 1 less than the number
before.
Essential Questions:
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 Why is number sense the foundation for
all mathematics?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 same
 two
 more
 three
 fewer
 four
 greater than
 five
 less than
 six
 pattern
 seven
 more than
 eight
 zero
 nine
 one
 ten
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.1
1.MP.1
1.MP.3
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
116
Chapter 2 Overview – Number Bonds
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: September
Brief Description of Chapter: Number bonding is closely related to both addition and
subtraction. When children understand the concept of number bonds, it will be easier
when they do addition and subtraction with regrouping at a later stage. In this chapter,
children are led to investigate all possible sets of two numbers that make a given
number up to 10. Recognizing the relationships between the parts and the whole will
also help children to understand formal number relationships such as the Commutative
Property of Addition.
Essential Questions:
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 Why is number sense the foundation for
all mathematics?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
Key Words/Terminology:
 part
 whole
 number bond
Enduring Understandings:
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing an effective way
to represent a quantity.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and multiple
representations when used together,
give a fuller understanding of a
problem.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.OA.3
1. MP.1
1. MP.2
1. MP.3
1. MP.5
1. MP.8
117
Chapter 3 Overview – Addition Facts to 10
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: October
Brief Description of Chapter: Addition is one of the four basic operations that form
the foundation of arithmetic and is an essential part of the computation work in
elementary school. Children are introduced to the basic strategies of addition such as
the part-whole concept involving number bonds, solving real-world addition problems
and the Commutative Property of Addition. This property not only makes computation
easier, but also lays the foundation for the study of algebra.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How do operations affect numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 add
 plus
 equal to
 more than
 addition sentence
 addition story
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.OA.1
1. MP.2
1.OA.3
1. MP.4
1.OA.5
1. MP.5
1.OA.6
1. MP.6
1.OA.7
1. MP.8
1.OA.8
118
Chapter 4 Overview – Subtraction Facts to 10
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: October
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will learn different methods of
subtraction, including the most basic method, which is the taking-away strategy. The
addition concept is the inverse of subtraction and one of the ways to subtract involves
counting back. Other strategies are counting on and using number bonds.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How do operations affect numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 take away
 subtract
 minus
 subtraction sentence
 less than
 subtraction story
 fact family
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.4
1.OA.4
1.OA.6
1.OA.7
1.OA.8
1.MP.4
1.MP.8
119
Chapter 5 Overview – Shapes and Patterns
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: November
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will compare shapes and
determine how they are alike and different, by describing their geometric attributes and
properties. In learning about solid shapes, with the addition of rectangular prisms and
pyramids, children are taught to recognize them from different perspectives and
orientations. Children will get to compose and decompose plane and solid shapes and
make patterns with plane and solid shapes. They will develop a better understanding of
part-whole relationships as well as the properties of the original and composite shapes.
This will also build a background for learning about measurement and properties of
geometry such as congruence and symmetry at higher grades.
Essential Questions:
 How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 What situations can be analyzed using
transformations and symmetries?
 How do geometric relationships help us
solve problems and/or make sense of
phenomena?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can attributes be used to classify
data/objects?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Shape and area can be conserved
during mathematical transformations.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 Grouping by attributes (classification)
can be used to answer mathematical
questions.
Key Words/Terminology:
 plane
 slide
 shapes
 roll
 circle
 repeating pattern
 triangle
 sort
 square
 color
 side
 alike
 corner
 size
 rectangle
 different
 cylinder
 rectangular prism
 pyramid
 cone
 stack
 cube
 sphere
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.G.1
1.G.2
1.G.3
1.MP.1
1.MP.3
1.MP.4
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
120
Chapter 6 Overview – Ordinal Numbers and Position
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month:
November/December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter children learn ordering numbers and
number positions with ordinal numbers as key number concepts. Children need
practice in identifying ordinal positions in their full (first, second, …tenth) and
abbreviated forms. Children also integrate their understanding of spatial relationships in
the real world and the concept of order and position. Relevant vocabulary that is
essential for understanding relative positions in a row includes left, right, in front of and
behind. These establish the starting point for determining ordinal positions.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm
both effective and efficient?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How do operations affect numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one
another to produce a coherent whole.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
Key Words/Terminology:
 first
 under
 second
 below
 third
 behind
 fourth
 next to
 fifth
 in front of
 sixth
 up
 seventh
 down
 before
 left
 after
 right
 between
 near
 above
 far
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
1.MP.4
1.MP.5
121
Chapter 7 Overview – Numbers to 20
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will learn how to count, read
and write numbers within 20. Children will learn to recognize the numbers 11 to 20 as 1
group of ten and a specific number of ones, as an introduction to the concept of place
value. Children’s understanding of the number concepts in this chapter will be applied
to comparing numbers to build number relationships. At this stage, they compare more
than two numbers, using the concepts of greatest and least and order a set of numbers
according to their relative magnitude. Children also learn to recognize and make
increasing and decreasing number patterns that involve a difference of 1 or 2 between
consecutive steps in the patterns.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How do operations affect numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 place-value chart
 greatest
 least
 order
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.1
1.NBT.2
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
1.MP.8
122
Chapter 8 Overview – Addition and Subtraction Facts
to 20
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month:
December/January
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children will learn more strategies for
addition and subtraction as they solve problems that include numbers between 10 and
20. They will learn to add or subtract by grouping the two-digit number as a 10 and
ones. They will also use the concept of number bonds to help develop new strategies
for addition and subtraction. The strategy of using doubles facts and doubles plus 1 is
introduced at this stage. Number bonds have the added benefit of displaying fact
families. Since addition and subtraction are inverse operations, there are families of
facts that relate addition and subtraction facts around two parts and a whole. Such
strategies are a foundation for adding and subtracting larger numbers. Children also
apply the strategies to solve real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How do operations affect numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 group
 same
 double facts
 doubles plus one
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.4
1.OA.1
1.OA.4
1.OA.6
1.OA.7
1.OA.8
1.MP.6
1.MP.8
123
Chapter 9 Overview – Length
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: January
Brief Description of Chapter: As an introduction to measuring length, children
compare the lengths of two objects both directly and indirectly and they order several
objects according to length. Their spatial awareness is exercised by having them
recognize vertical length as height as children learn to compare the length and height of
objects in the classroom and the real-world. In this chapter, non-standard units are
used to measure length. It requires children to integrate their understanding of number,
measurement, and geometry. This prepares children for measuring with standardized
units and measurement systems.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
Enduring Understandings:
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Key Words/Terminology:
 tall
 taller
 tallest
 short
 shorter
 shortest
 long
 longer
 longest
 start line
 about
 unit
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.MP.2
1.MP.3
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
1.MD.1
124
Chapter 11 – Picture Graphs and Bar Graphs
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter children will learn to understand and
interpret data from picture graphs and bar graphs. Children’s counting skills are utilized
in the collection of data. They are led to see how the data collected can be compiled
into picture graphs or bar graphs. The strategy of using tally marks is a way to organize
data better. This chapter guides children in learning about how data can be
represented in a pictorial way, which is particularly engaging for children this age.
Essential Questions:
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 The message conveyed by the data is
collected, represented, and
summarized.
 The results of statistical investigation
can be used to support or refute an
argument.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Key Words/Terminology:
 data
 picture graph
 more
 fewer
 most
 fewest
 tally mark
 tally chart
 bar graph
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.MD.4
1.OA.8
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
125
Chapter 12 – Numbers to 40
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: February/March
Brief Description of Chapter: Children have learned counting skills as well as basic
operations in adding and subtracting numbers to 20. Children understand the strategy
of making a ten as well as the purpose of place-value charts. The place-value chart
enables children to make comparisons between two or more numbers, when tens are
different or when tens are equal. Children apply this knowledge when they order
numbers in ascending or descending order. With children familiar with the counting,
comparing and ordering of numbers to 40, they are then able to identify the pattern
within a number pattern. This builds the foundation that children will rely upon when
they learn about numbers to 100 in Chapter 16.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 twenty-one
 twenty-two
 twenty-three
 twenty-four
 twenty-five
 twenty-six
 twenty-seven
 twenty-eight
 twenty-nine
 thirty
 forty
 counting tape
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.1
1.NBT.2
1.NBT.3
1.OA.5
1.OA.8
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
1.MP.5
1.MP.7
126
Chapter 13 – Addition and Subtraction to 40
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children are taught vertical form based
on place value that can be used to add or subtract numbers with and without
regrouping. In teaching children to regroup, they are encouraged to use place-value
charts to correctly align the digits and to record the regrouping process. Children
develop their addition skills further by learning to apply the Associative Property of
Addition and number bonds when adding three 1-digit numbers using the strategy of
making a 10. Lastly, the learning of addition and subtraction with and without
regrouping is applied to real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 count on
 place-value chart
 regroup
 count back
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.2
1.OA.8
1.NBT.4
1.MP.1
1.NBT.6
1.MP.2
1.OA.1
1.MP.2
1.OA.2
1.MP.3
1.OA.5
1.MP.4
1.OA.6
1.MP.5
1.OA.7
1.MP.8
127
Chapter 14 – Mental Math Strategies
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: April
Brief Description of Chapter: Children will use mental math strategies as they
develop alternate algorithms to solve more complex computational and real-world
problems. Mental math strategies will also be used as children estimate to check the
validity of their calculations. Children have already learned the addition and subtraction
facts, the part-whole concept in number bonds, as well as place values of numbers to
20. These form an important basis for the learning and application of strategies when
doing addition and subtraction mentally. At this stage, it is helpful to introduce and then
apply from this point forward mental calculation of 2 digit numbers. Various strategies
are suggested depending on the numbers, and if 1-or 2-digits are involved in the
addition and subtraction sentences. These strategies can subsequently be applied
when children gain confidence, thus eliminating the time-consuming need to depend on
counting on or counters to derive the answers, especially when dealing with greater
numbers in later chapters.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 What is the best way to solve this?
 What counting strategy works best
here?
Enduring Understandings:
 The results of statistical investigation
can be used to support or refute an
argument.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algorithms can effectively and
efficiently be used to quantify and
interpret discrete information.
Key Words/Terminology:
 mentally
 doubles fact
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.4
1.MP.1
1.NBT.5
1.MP.2
1.OA.1
1.MP.3
1.OA.3
1.MP.5
1.OA.6
1.MP.6
1.OA.7
1.MP.8
1.OA.8
128
Chapter 16 – Numbers to 100
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children are taught to count on from 40
to 120 with the tens fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, and one hundred highlighted. In
knowing that a 2-digit number is made up of tens and ones, children can count in tens
before counting the remaining ones when identifying a 2-digit number. With the
emphasis on place value, children are taught to compare 2-digit numbers which have
different tens, and numbers which have equal tens by focusing on the ones. In being
able to compare numbers, children go on to ordering them accordingly. Once children
can order numbers, they observe number patterns and find missing numbers in a
pattern. Children are also asked to form their own number patterns, thus encouraging
them to think critically. This chapter lays the foundation for children to develop their
addition and subtraction skills with larger numbers, a skill they will learn in Chapter 17.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the world
around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Algebraic representation can be used
to generalize patterns and
relationships.
Key Words/Terminology:
 fifty
 one hundred
 sixty
 estimate
 seventy
 number line
 eighty
 ninety
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.NBT.1
1.MP.4
1.NBT.2
1.MP.5
1.OA.5
1.MP.6
1.MP.1
1MP.7
1.MP.2
1.MP.3
129
Chapter 17 – Addition and Subtraction to 100
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children extend the standard vertical
form for addition and subtraction numbers to 100. Children are presented with two
methods that can be used; counting on/back and using place-value charts. The
application of place-value regrouping in addition and subtraction is again revisited so
children familiarize themselves with when there is the need for it; that is, when the
addition of ones exceeds 9, and when the subtraction of ones cannot be carried out
because of insufficient ones. This chapter consolidates what children have learned in
Chapter 13: Addition and Subtraction to 40, as well as Chapter 16: Numbers to 120.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing effective ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Algebraic representation can be used
to generalize patterns and
relationships.
Key Words/Terminology:
 same
 groups
 each
 share
 equally
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
1.MP.3
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
1.MP.8
1.G.3
130
Chapter 18 – Multiplication and Division
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, the concept of multiplication without
using the word ‘multiplication’ is linked to the part-whole meaning of addition. In earlier
chapters, children learned how to join groups (parts) to find a total (whole), how to use
doubles facts, and how to use addition properties to add three numbers. These addition
concepts form an important basis for understanding multiplication in Grade 2 as
repeated addition. Division is the opposite of multiplication. Division can be understood
as separating a group (whole) into equal groups (parts). Number-sense concepts such
as counting and comparing numbers form the groundwork for division: finding the
numbers of equal groups of a given size and finding the size of a given number of
groups. At this grade level, it is important to use models. Children may need to depend
heavily on manipulatives such as counters to comprehend the two meanings of division.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
and/or algorithm both effective and
efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one
another to produce a coherent whole.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Key Words/Terminology:
 same
 groups
 each
 share
 equally
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
1.MP.3
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
1.MP.8
1.G.3
131
Chapter 19 – Money
Grade: 1
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, children recall their knowledge of the
penny, nickel, dime, and quarter. Children are taught to count the value of different
coins by applying the strategies of counting on and skip-counting from the coin of
greatest value by first arranging the coins in order. Children learn that the same amount
of money can be represented in different combinations of coins. In conjunction with the
concept of counting money, children go on to using addition and subtraction in realworld situations that involve money. With the ability to recognize coins and count
money in real-world problems, children are able to make simple purchases and find the
amount of change in everyday experiences.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How do mathematical ideas
 One representation may sometimes be
interconnect and build on one another
more helpful than another; and, used
to produce a coherent whole?
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
 How can counting, measuring, or
depends on choosing effective ways.
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
 How can we use mathematical models
appropriately use numbers.
to describe physical relationships?
 Mathematical models can be used to
 How can we use physical models to
describe and quantify physical
clarify mathematical relationships?
relationships.
 What is the best way to solve this?
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algorithms can effectively and
efficiently be used to quantify and
interpret discrete information.
Key Words/Terminology:
 cents
 nickel
 value
 penny
 dime
 exchange
 quarter
 change
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
1.OA.7
1.MP.1
1.MP.2
1.MP.3
1.MP.5
1.MP.6
132
Chapter 1 Overview – Numbers to 1, 000
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Sept.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, the students will be able to identify a
number and place it according to the value of its digits in terms of ones, tens, and
hundreds. Students also learn to identify numbers in both numerals and words. They
are also encouraged to compare and verbally describe more than two numbers in a set
using terms least and greatest.
Essential Questions:
 How can counting help to make sense
of the world around us?
 How can the use of countable objects
help to develop the association
between the physical representation of
the number, the number symbol, and
the number word?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can we order three-digit numbers
and identify number patterns using
place-value charts and number lines?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical patterns.
 Place value is based on groups of 10.
Key Words/Terminology:
 hundred
 hundreds
 thousand
 standard form
 word form
 expanded form
 greater than (>)
 less than (<)
 greatest
 least
 more than
 less than
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.NBT.1a
2.NBT.1b
2.NBT.2
2.NBT.3
2.NBT.4
2.MD.6
2.SMP.1
2.SMP.2
2.SMP.3
2.SMP.4
2.SMP.5
2.SMP.6
2.SMP.7
133
Chapter 10 Overview – Mental Math and Estimation
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are taught the meaning of sum and
difference and practice using mental addition and subtraction with the basic and
advanced strategies previously introduced (ones->tens->hundreds or add/subtract 10
first). The concept of number bonds in integral to the above-mentioned strategies
related to mental addition and subtraction. An important application of place value and
number sense is rounding. Just as number bonds provide a visual for mental math
strategies, the number line is used as a visual representation that illustrates the
rounding concept. At this level, students learn to round to the nearest ten to decide if
their answers in addition and subtraction are reasonable.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
 How can place value and numberbond strategies help with mental
addition and subtraction?
 How can estimating help in
understanding a reasonable sum and
difference?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Context is critical when using
estimation.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Number sense develops through
experience.
Key Words/Terminology:
 sum
 add mentally
 difference
 subtract mentally
 number line
 about
 round
 nearest ten
 estimate
 reasonable
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.OA.1
2.OA.2
2.NBT.5
2.NBT.5
2.NBT.7
2.NBT.8
2.NBT.9
2.MD.6
SMP.1
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
134
Chapter 2 Overview – Addition up to 1,000
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: Students previously learned the Commutative Property
of Addition, Associative Property of Addition, Identity Property in Addition, composing
and decomposing numbers through place value and number bonds, and the application
of place value in addition. In this unit, the students will apply these same concepts to 3digit numbers. They are taught multiple regroupings by using base-10 blocks and a
place value chart as concrete representations, allowing them to visualize addition with
regrouping in the ones and tens place.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 What is the best solution for solving a
problem?
 How can we use math information to
choose an operation?
 How can the use of regrouping aid in
the process of solving addition
problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Math processes can give students the
tools needed to help them become
problem solvers.
 Different math approaches can yield
the same results.
 Place value is based on groups of 10.
Key Words/Terminology:
 add
 place-value chart
 regroup
 base-10 blocks
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.NBT.1a
2.NBT.3
2.NBT.5
2.NBT.6
2.NBT.7
2.NBT.9
SMP.1
SMP.4
135
Chapter 3 Overview – Subtraction up to 1,000
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn two types of multi-digit
subtraction: basic subtraction without regrouping and subtraction with regrouping.
Students practice subtraction with regrouping using base-10 blocks and place value
charts as concrete representations, aiding children in visualizing the regrouping of tens
as ones, hundreds as tens, and hundreds as tens and ones. The relationship between
addition and subtraction (inverse operations) is stressed and the students use addition
to check subtraction.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 What is the best solution for solving a
problem?
 How can we use math information to
choose an operation?
 How can the use of regrouping aid in
the process of solving subtraction
problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Place value is based on groups of 10.
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Math processes can give students the
tools needed to help them become
problem solvers.
 Different math approaches can yield
the same results.
Key Words/Terminology:
 subtract
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.NBT.1a
SMP.1
2.NBT.3
SMP.2
2.NBT.5
SMP.4
2.NBT.6
SMP.5
2.NBT.7
SMP.7
2.NBT.9
SMP.8
2.MD.6
136
Chapter 4 Overview – Using Bar Models: Addition and
Subtraction
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Dec.
Brief Description of Chapter: Students learn to use bar models as a strategy to solve
addition and subtraction problems. They also learn to compare two models to solve
more complex addition and subtraction problems. A combination of all these strategies
is used in solving two-step real world problems. The part-part-whole concept illustrated
in bar models teaches children to represent values on a single bar model by dividing the
model into parts. Bar models provide a useful, pictorial representation of sets as parts
making up a whole. Students label the bars with words as well as numbers, so they can
use bar models to illustrate a problem, indicating on the model the known and unknown
parts or the whole.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 What is the best solution for solving a
part-part-whole problem in addition or
subtraction?
 How can we use math information to
choose an operation?
 How can students use bar modeling to
add on or take away sets to add or
subtract?
Key Words/Terminology:
 join
 set
 take away
 compare
 connecting cubes
 paper strips
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Math processes can give students the
tools needed to help them become
problem solvers.
 Different math approaches can yield
the same results.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.NBT.5
SMP.1
2.NBT.6
SMP.2
2.NBT.7
SMP.3
2.NBT.9
SMP.4
2.MD.5
SMP.5
2.MD.6
SMP.6
2.OA.1
SMP.7
SMP.8
137
Chapter 5 Overview – Multiplication and Division
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students move to the pictorial and symbolic
phases through the emphasis on equal groups. Multiplication is used to find the number
of items in a number of equal groups. Division is used in two ways. First, in sharing a
number of items among a number of groups divide to find the number of items in each
group. Second, from a number of items that each group receives, to find the number of
equal groups that can be formed. The strategy of repeated subtraction is used to
explicate the concept of division.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do I decide which strategy will
work best in a given problem situation?
 What are the mathematical properties
that govern multiplication and division?
How would you use them?
 How can pictures with multiples or
equal groups be used to write or solve
multiplication and division stories and
sentences?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 Math processes can give students the
tools needed to help them become
problem solvers.
 Different math approaches can yield
the same results.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 The relationships among the
operations and their properties promote
computational fluency.
Key Words/Terminology:
 equal
 times
 group
 divide
 multiplication
 division
sentence
sentence
 multiplication
 equal groups
story
 repeated
 multiply
subtraction
 repeated
 share
addition
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
138
Chapter 6 Overview – Multiplication Tables of 2, 5 and
10
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are taught multiplication tables of
2, 5 and 10 using skip counting and dot paper strategies. Pictures and fingers illustrate
the skip counting strategy related to computation in multiplication. Dot paper can also
be used to represent the group and item concept related to computation in
multiplication. Students also learn to use related multiplication facts to divide. Division
here is conceptualized as the inverse of multiplication and as the equal sharing of items.
A distinction is made between sharing a number of items into a given number of groups
and putting an equal number of items into groups. Students will write multiplication and
division sentences to solve real world problems.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can skip-counting and dot-paper
be used as tools to best represent
multiplication problems?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How do I decide which strategy will
work best in a given problem situation?
 How can multiples be used to solve
problems?
 How can children apply the inverse
relationship of multiplication and
division to write division sentences
from related multiplication sentences?
Enduring Understandings:
Key Words/Terminology:
 skip count
 dot paper
 related multiplication facts
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.OA.2
2.OA.4
2.NBT.2
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8








139
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Operations create relationships between
numbers.
The relationships among the operations
and their properties promote computational
fluency.
Chapter 7 Overview – Metric Measurement of Length
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks, Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to estimate and measure
length using the standard metric units of meters (m) and centimeters (cm). The meter
stick and the centimeter ruler are used to illustrate length as a concept of measure to
determine how long or short an object is. The length of curved lines can be measured
by using a piece of string which is place along the curved along the curved line and then
measured with a ruler. Students begin to recognize that standard units of measure
provide a basis for the comparison of lengths. The students apply addition and
subtraction concepts to real world problems involving metric lengths. Bar modeling is
used to help them solve these real world problems using length and short distances.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 Why do we measure?
 Why is there a need for standardized
units of measure?
 What are the standard metric units of
length?
 What are the tools of measurement
and how can they be used?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 What we measure effects how we
measure it.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 Measurement describes the attributes
of objects and events.
 Standard units of measure enable
people to interpret results or data.
Key Words/Terminology:
 meter stick
 length
 meter (m)
 unit
 width
 height
 taller, tallest
 shorter, shortest
 longer, longest
 centimeter (cm)
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.MD.1
SMP.1
2.MD.3
SMP.2
2.MD.4
SMP.4
2.MD.5
SMP.5
2.MD.6
SMP.6
140
Chapter 8 Overview – Mass
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks, Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to estimate and measure the
mass of objects using the standard metric units of kilogram (kg) and grams (g).
Students read the masses of objects from measuring scales in these units. Another
way of finding the mass of objects involves a balance with 1-kilogram and 1-gram
masses. Experiments are conducted using the measuring scale to compare the
masses of two objects, as well as to determine the masses of objects using addition and
subtraction of objects.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How does mass describe how heavy
an object is?
 What are the metric units of measure
for mass?
 What are the tools of measurement
and how can they be used?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 What we measure effects how we
measure it.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 Measurement describes the attributes
of objects and events.
 Standard units of measure enable
people to interpret results or data.
Key Words/Terminology:
 kilogram (kg)
 mass
 measuring scale
 as heavy as
 less than
 more than
 heavier than
 lighter than
 heaviest
 lightest
 gram (g)
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.MD.2
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.7
141
Chapter 9 Overview – Volume
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks, Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: Getting to know volume, its units and properties is the
main focus of this unit. The emphasis is on the amount or volume of liquids and not
containers. Students learn that the liter (L) is the unit of measure that provides a basis
for the comparison of volume. Various hands-on activities are utilized to illustrate the
concept that the volume of a liquid remains unchanged when poured into different
containers. In addition, the students apply the concepts of addition and subtraction to
one and two step real world problems involving volume.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 Why do we measure?
 Why is there a need for standardized
units of measure?
 What are the tools of measurement
and how can they be used?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 What is the metric unit of measure for
volume?
 How can you compare the volume of
liquids in both identical and nonidentical containers?
Enduring Understandings:
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 What we measure effects how we
measure it.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 Measurement describes the attributes
of objects and events.
 Standard units of measure enable
people to interpret results or data.
Key Words/Terminology:
 volume
 more than
 less than
 as much as
 most
 least
 liter (l)
 measuring cup
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.NBT.5
2.NBT.6
2.NBT.7
2.MD.5
2.MD.6
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.7
142
Chapter 11 Overview – Money
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are taught to recognize the $1 bill,
$5 bill, $10 bill and $20 bill. Using bills and coins, students learn to show and to count
money up to $20. Money provides a natural introduction to decimal notation. Students
learn to write money amounts as $ (dollars) and cents, as well as compare amounts of
money. Tables are used to model grouping given money amounts into dollars and
cents. Students practice comparing values from left to right. Bar models are used to
solve real-world problems involving the addition and subtraction of money.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How can money best be represented
mathematically?
 What are the respective values of coins
and dollars?
 How does the use of a decimal point
separate dollars from cents?
 How can different coin/dollar
combinations represent or be
exchanged for the same value?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Understand place value and how it
relates to dollars and cents
 Understand counting coin and dollar
amounts and combinations up to
twenty dollars.
 Even exchanges among coins and
dollars do not change the monetary
value.
Key Words/Terminology:
 $1 bill
 $5 bill
 $10 bill
 $20 bill
 cent sign 
 dollar sign $
 decimal point
 table
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
2.MD.8
SMP.1
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.6
143
Chapter 12 Overview – Fractions
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1 week, March
Brief Description of Chapter: Students learn to model and name halves, thirds, and
fourths based on the number of equal parts in a whole. Bar model drawings learned
earlier can also be used to show fractional parts in different ways. Visual models can
be further used to compare fractional parts. Using identical models, children will be able
to compare fractions and distinguish a greater fraction from one that is less. They will
use models to show that a fraction with a greater bottom number is not necessarily
greater in value than a fraction with a bottom number that is less. Students will also
learn to apply fraction models to add and subtract fractions with the same bottom
number.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How are fractions used in real life?
 How are fractions represented and
compared?
 How are concrete materials and
drawings used to show understanding
of fractions?
 How can using models aid in adding
and subtracting like fractions?
 How do you show/identify fractions for
halves, thirds and fourths using model
drawings?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Partition a whole into halves, thirds and
fourths.
 Equal shares of identical wholes do not
need to have the same shape.
Key Words/Terminology:
 equal
 one-fourth
 unequal
 unit fraction
 whole
 same
 fraction
 greater than
 one-half
 less than
 one third
 like fractions
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.4
SMP.6
SMP.7
2.G.2
2.G.3
144
Chapter 13 Overview – Customary Measurement of
Length
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks,
March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to estimate and measure the
lengths of objects using a foot ruler. They begin to recognize that a foot/feet is used in
measuring length of bigger objects, while inch/inches is used for measuring the lengths
of objects that are relatively smaller. Note: every measurement is an estimate. The
precision of measurement depends on the size of the unit used to measure an object.
The smaller the unit, the more precise the measurement. Students practice drawing
lines of specific lengths. They will apply the strategies learned in this chapter, as well
as that of addition and subtraction to solving one- and two-step real-world word
problems involving length using bar models.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 Why do we measure?
 Why is there a need for standardized
units of measure?
 What are the standard U.S. Customary
units of length?
 What are the tools of measurement
and how can they be used?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 What we measure effects how we
measure it.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 Measurement describes the attributes
of objects and events.
 Standard units of measure enable
people to interpret results or data.
Key Words/Terminology:
 foot/feet (ft)
 longest
 length
 shortest
 ruler
 inch (in)
 unit
 width
 height
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
2.NBT.9
SMP.4
2.MD.1
SMP.5
2.MD.3
SMP.6
2.MD.4
2.NBT.5
2.MD.5
2.NBT.6
2.MD.6
2.NBT.7
2.OA.1
145
Chapter 14 Overview – Time
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks,
March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn how to read time based
on the position of the minute hand on the clock, and that the minute hand tells the
number of minutes after the hour. Using the skip-counting strategy, students learn to
tell how many minutes have passed, and how to read and write time in hours and
minutes using numerals and words. The students practice using the terms, A.M. and
P.M., to show morning, afternoon, or night. With these terms, children will learn to order
events by time. Finally, students will learn to determine how much time has elapsed.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How does the minute hand on the clock
relate to skip counting strategy?
 How are the hour and minute of a given
time both analog and digitally read and
written?
 How does one differentiate morning,
afternoon and night using A.M. and
P.M.?
 How does time relate to sequencing of
events?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Recognizing analog and digital time
notation related to hours and minutes.
 Identifying A.M. and P.M. as they relate
to morning, afternoon and night.
 Placement of minute hand on the clock
relates directly to skip counting
strategy.
Key Words/Terminology:
 hour hand
 after
 minute hand
 clock face
 minute
 A.M.
 hour
 P.M.
 o’clock
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.6
2.MD.7
146
Chapter 15 Overview – Multiplication Tables of 3 and 4
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are taught the multiplication facts
of 3 and 4 using the skip-counting and dot-paper strategies. Students also practice
using related multiplication facts to divide. They are taught that division is the inverse of
multiplication and is used when putting things in equal groups. A distinction is made
between putting a number of items into a given number of groups and putting an equal
number of items into groups. Students apply the Commutative Property of
Multiplication, as well as the inverse relationship between multiplication and division, to
form related families of facts. Multiplication and division sentences are written to solve
real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can skip-counting and dot-paper
be used as tools to best represent
multiplication problems?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How do I decide which strategy will
work best in a given problem situation?
 How can multiples be used to solve
problems?
 How can children apply the inverse
relationship of multiplication and
division to write division sentences
from related multiplication sentences?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 The relationships among the
operations and their properties promote
computational fluency.
 There can be different strategies to
solve a problem, but some are more
effective and efficient than others.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 skip-count
 dot paper
 related multiplication facts
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
2.OA.4
147
Chapter 16 Overview – Using Bar Models:
Multiplication and Division
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2 weeks, April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students use bar models in solving realworld multiplication and division problems. Multiplication is conceptualized as finding
the total number of items, given the number of groups, while division is conceptualized
as sharing or dividing a set of items into equal groups, so that each group has the same
number of items. To culminate, students apply the concepts and strategies to solve
real-world problems involving multiplication, division, measurement, and money.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can skip-counting and dot-paper
be used as tools to best represent
multiplication problems?
 How can we use bar models to clarify
mathematical relationships between
multiplication and division?
 How do I decide which strategy will
work best in a given problem situation?
 How can multiples be used to solve
problems?
 How can children apply the inverse
relationship of multiplication and
division to write division sentences
from related multiplication sentences?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 The relationships among the
operations and their properties promote
computational fluency.
 There can be different strategies to
solve a problem, but some are more
effective and efficient than others.
 The message conveyed by the data is
collected, represented, and
summarized.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Different math approaches can yield
the same results.
Key Words/Terminology:
 bar models
 groups
 items
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.6
2.MD.5
2.MD.6
148
Chapter 17 Overview – Picture Graphs
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1.5 weeks, May
Brief Description of Chapter: Students will learn to analyze more complex picture
graphs. The reading, analysis, and interpretation of picture graphs involve symbols that
may represent more than one item. Students connect their knowledge of multiplication
and division with creating and reading picture graphs. Lastly, students practice solving
word problems using the data they find in the picture graph. Consequently they
encounter questions that assess their ability to read, analyze, and interpret picture
graphs.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
 How does reading and displaying data
in pictorial form aid in solving real-world
problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 There can be different strategies to
solve a problem, but some are more
effective and efficient than others.
 The message conveyed by the data is
collected, represented, and
summarized.
 The results of statistical investigation
can be used to support or refute an
argument.
Key Words/Terminology:
 picture graph
 key
 symbol
 record
 tally chart
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.6
2.MD.10
149
Chapter 18 Overview – Lines and Surfaces
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 1 week, May
Brief Description of Chapter: Students will learn to recognize, identify, and describe
parts of lines and curves that make up plane and solid shapes. They will also learn to
combine parts of lines and curves to draw plane shapes. Students use their senses of
sight and touch to identify, classify, and count flat and curved surfaces of solid shapes.
The properties of different surfaces are also explored.
Essential Questions:
 How can a spatial relationship be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 How do geometric relationships help us
solve problems and/or make sense of
phenomena?
 How can geometry relate to real world
connections?
 Why is geometry important?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 Points, lines, and planes are the
foundation of geometry.
 Geometry and spatial sense offer ways
to interpret and reflect on our physical
environment.
 Analyzing geometric relationships
develops reasoning and justification
skills.
Key Words/Terminology:
 part of line
 curve
 flat surface
 curved surface
 slide
 stack
 roll
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.6
2.G.1
150
Chapter 19 Overview – Shapes and Patterns
Grade: 2
Amount of Time/Month: 2.5 weeks,
May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students expand their knowledge of plane
shapes including how to combine smaller shapes to make larger plane shapes and
separate larger shapes to make smaller shapes. The students practice using dot-paper
and square grid paper to construct shapes and figures; they also have the opportunity to
build models by combining solid shapes. Finally, students identify, describe, extend,
and create more complex patterns using different sizes, shapes, colors, and positions
(turnings).
Essential Questions:
 How can a spatial relationship be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 How do geometric relationships help us
solve problems and/or make sense of
phenomena?
 How can geometry relate to real world
connections?
 Why is geometry important?
 How can objects be represented and
compared using geometric attributes?
 How can combining or separating
plane shapes create larger or smaller
plane shapes?
 How can using different sizes, shapes
and positions create more complex
patterns?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 Points, lines, and planes are the
foundation of geometry.
 Geometry and spatial sense offer ways
to interpret and reflect on our physical
environment.
 Analyzing geometric relationships
develops reasoning and justification
skills.
Key Words/Terminology:
 plane shape
 shape
 hexagon
 repeating pattern
 trapezoid
 size
 figure
 turning
 pattern
 pattern unit
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.6
SMP.8
2.G.1
151
Math Pacing Guide: Grades 3-5
Grade 3
Grade 4
Grade 5
September
Chapter 1: Numbers to
10,000
Chapter 2: Mental Math and
Estimation
Chapter 1: Place Value of
Whole Numbers
Chapter 1: Whole Numbers
October
Chapter 2 (cont’d.): Mental
Math and Estimation
Chapter 3: Addition up to
10,000
Chapter 4: Subtraction up to
10,000
Chapter 2: Estimation and
Number Theory
Chapter 3: Whole Number
Multiplication and Division
Chapter 2: Whole Number
Multiplication and Division
Chapter 3: Fractions and
Mixed Numbers
November
Chapter 5: Using Bar Models:
Addition and Subtraction
Chapter 6: Multiplication
Tables of 6, 7, 8, and 9
Chapter 3 (cont’d.): Whole
Number Multiplication and
Division
Chapter 4: Tables and Line
Graphs
Chapter 4: Multiplying and
Dividing Fractions and
Mixed Numbers
December
Chapter 6 (cont’d.):
Multiplication Tables of 6, 7, 8,
and 9
Chapter 7: Multiplication
Chapter 4 (cont’d.): Tables
and Line Graphs
Chapter 5: Data and
Probability
Chapter 5: Algebra
Chapter 6: Area of a
Triangle
January
Chapter 8: Division
Chapter 9: Using Bar Models:
Multiplication and Division
Chapter 10: Money
Chapter 5 (cont’d.): Data
and Probability
Chapter 6: Fractions and
Mixed Numbers
Chapter 7: Ratio
Chapter 8: Decimals
February
Chapter 11: Metric Length,
Mass, and Volume
Chapter 12: Real-World
Problems: Measurements
Chapter 13: Bar Graphs and
Line Plots
Chapter 7: Decimals
Chapter 8: Adding and
Subtracting Decimals
Chapter 9: Multiplying and
Dividing Decimals
Chapter 10: Percent
March
Chapter 14: Fractions
Chapter 15: Customary
Length, Weight, and
Capacity
Chapter 9: Angles
Chapter 10: Perpendicular
and Parallel Line Segments
Chapter 10 (cont’d.):
Percent
Chapter 11: Graphs and
Probability
April
Chapter 15 (cont’d):
Customary Length, Weight,
and Capacity
Chapter 16: Time and
Temperature
Chapter 11: Squares and
Rectangles
Chapter 12: Area and
Perimeter
Chapter 15: Surface Area
and Volume
Chapter 12: Angles
Chapter 17: Angles and
Chapter 13: Properties of
Lines
Triangles and Four-Sided
Chapter 13: Symmetry
Chapter 18: TwoFigures
May/June
Dimensional Shapes
Chapter 14: Tessellations
Chapter 14: ThreeChapter 19: Area and
Dimensional Shapes
Perimeter
The above timeline is to be used as a guideline to provide a “snapshot” of the year at a glance.
152
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades 3-5
153
Chapter 1 Overview – Numbers to 10,000
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 2 weeks, September
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit students will apply number and place value
concepts to count and compare numbers from one to ten-thousand.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
 Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Key Words/Terminology:
 word form
 standard form
 digit
 place value chart
 place value strip
 expanded form
 greater than
 less than
 least
 greatest
 rule
 number line
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.OA.9
SMP.1
SMP.4
SMP.5
154
Chapter 2 Overview – Mental Math and Estimation
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, Sept./Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on the use of mental math strategies
through the composition and decomposition of numbers (number bonds). Students will
use estimation to check the reasonableness of sums and differences.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 Context is critical when using
estimation.
Key Words/Terminology:
 rounded
 estimate
 reasonable
 over estimate
 leading digit
 front end estimation
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.1
3.NBT.2
3.OA.8
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
155
Chapter 3 Overview – Addition up to 10,000
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, October
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on the addition of 4-digit to 4-digit
numbers to 10,000 using right-to-left regrouping strategies.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Key Words/Terminology:
 sum
 regroup
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
156
Chapter 4 Overview – Subtraction up to 10,000
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, Oct./Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on the subtraction of 4-digit from 4digit numbers up to 10,000 using right-to-left regrouping strategies.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning,
but also the appropriate use of
numerical operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Key Words/Terminology:
 difference
 regroup
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
157
Chapter 5 Overview – Using Bar Models: Addition and
Subtraction
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 6 Days, November
Brief Description of Chapter: The focus of this unit is to solve real world problems by
using bar models and applying addition and subtraction concepts up to 10,000.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the world
around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
 How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
 Context is critical when using estimation.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole.
 Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems
in algebra.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
 Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
158
Chapter 5 Overview – Using Bar Models: Addition and
Subtraction (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 sum
 difference
 bar model
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
3.OA.8
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.6
SMP.8
159
Chapter 6 Overview – Multiplication Tables of 6, 7, 8,
and 9
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 14 Days, Nov./Dec.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will multiply and divide with tables
of 6, 7, 8, and 9 using models and known multiplication facts.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the world
around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
 How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?
Enduring Understandings:













160
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
How can patterns, relations, and functions
be used as tools to best describe and help
explain real-life situations?
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another to
produce a coherent whole.
Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems in
algebra.
Chapter 6 Overview – Multiplication Tables of 6, 7, 8, 9
(cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 skip
 dot paper
 number line
 commutative property of multiplication
 associative property of multiplication
 multiplicative property of one
 multiplicative property of zero
 array model
 area model
 equal groups
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.3
3.OA.1
3.OA.2
3.OA.3
3.OA.4
3.OA.5
3.OA.6
3.OA.7
3.OA.9
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
161
Chapter 7 Overview – Multiplication
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will multiply 2 and 3 digit numbers
with and without regrouping.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the world
around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
 How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole.
 Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems
in algebra.
162
Chapter 7 Overview – Multiplication (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 product
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.3
3.OA.4
3.OA.5
3.OA.7
3.OA.9
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
163
Chapter 8 Overview – Division
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 9 Days, Dec./Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will multiply divide 2 and 3 digit
numbers with and without regrouping.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the world
around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
 How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
 The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
 In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
 The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole.
 Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems
in algebra.
164
Chapter 8 Overview – Division (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 quotient
 remainder
 even numbers
 odd numbers
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.OA.3
3.OA.4
3.OA.5
3.OA.6
3.OA.7
3.OA.9
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.8
165
Chapter 9 Overview – Using Bar Models:
Multiplication and Division
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 11 Days, January
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on solving two-step real world
problems involving multiplication and division using bar models.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:












How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or labeling
help to make sense of the world around
us?
What makes a computational strategy both
effective and efficient?
How do operations affect numbers?
How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How are patterns of change related to the
behavior of functions?
How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to clarify
mathematical relationships?
What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?












166
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
How can patterns, relations, and functions
be used as tools to best describe and help
explain real-life situations?
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another to
produce a coherent whole.
Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems in
algebra.
Chapter 9 Overview – Using Bar Models:
Multiplication and Division (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 twice
 double
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.OA.3
3.OA.4
3.OA.5
3.OA.6
3.OA.7
3.OA.8
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.8
167
Chapter 10 Overview – Money
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 9 Days, Jan./Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will recognize, read, and write the
decimal notation for money. They will add and subtract money with and without
regrouping.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:












How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or labeling
help to make sense of the world around
us?
What makes a computational strategy both
effective and efficient?
How do operations affect numbers?
How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How are patterns of change related to the
behavior of functions?
How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to clarify
mathematical relationships?
What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?












168
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
How can patterns, relations, and functions
be used as tools to best describe and help
explain real-life situations?
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another to
produce a coherent whole.
Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems in
algebra.
Chapter 10 Overview – Money (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 decimal notation
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
169
Chapter 11 Overview – Metric Length, Mass, and
Volume
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will measure and convert length,
mass, and volume in metric Chapters.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Context is critical when using
estimation.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 What we measure affects how we
measure it.
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Key Words/Terminology:
 meter
 liter
 centimeter
 milliliter
 kilometer
 volume
 distance
 capacity
 kilogram
 gram
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.MD.2
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
170
Chapter 12 Overview – Real-World Problems:
Measurement
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 6 Days, February
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on solving two-step real-world
problems involving metric units of measurement and the application of the four
operations.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:













How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or labeling
help to make sense of the world around
us?
What makes a computational strategy both
effective and efficient?
How do operations affect numbers?
How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
How can we decide when to use an exact
answer and when to use an estimate?
How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
How can measurements be used to solve
problems?
How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to clarify
mathematical relationships?
How are patterns of change related to the
behavior of functions?
What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?















171
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
Context is critical when using estimation.
Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be measured
in many ways.
What we measure affects how we measure
it.
Measurements can be used to describe,
compare, and make sense of phenomena.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another to
produce a coherent whole.
Reasoning and/or proof can be used to
verify or refute conjectures or theorems in
algebra.
Key Words/Terminology:
n/a
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
3.OA.7
3.MD.2
SMP.1
3.OA.3
SMP.2
3.OA.4
SMP.4
3.OA.5
SMP.5
3.OA.6
172
Chapter 13 Overview – Bar Graphs and Line Plots
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 7 Days, March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will make bar graphs with scales.
They will read and interpret bar graphs to solve real-world problems and use line plots
to show how data is grouped, compared and spread.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can change be best represented
mathematically?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
Enduring Understandings:















173
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different
cultures.
Context is critical when using estimation.
Measurements can be used to describe,
compare, and make sense of phenomena.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
The message conveyed by the data
depends on how the data is collected,
represented, and summarized.
The results of statistical investigation can
be used to support or refute an argument.
Chapter 13 Overview – Bar Graphs and Line Plots
(cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 vertical
 horizontal
 axis
 scale
 line plot
 survey
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.MD.3
3.MD.4
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
174
Chapter 14 Overview – Fractions
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 13 Days, March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit students will develop an understanding of
fractions and use them to represent parts of a whole, points or distances on a number
line, and parts of a set. Students will find equivalent fractions and add and subtract like
fractions.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:














How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or labeling
help to make sense of the world around
us?
What makes a computational strategy both
effective and efficient?
How do operations affect numbers?
How can we decide when to use an exact
answer and when to use an estimate?
How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How can patterns, relations, and functions
be used as tools to best describe and help
explain real-life situations?
How are patterns of change related to the
behavior of functions?
How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to clarify
mathematical relationships?
What makes an algebraic algorithm both
effective and efficient?














175
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
Context is critical when using estimation.
Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be measured
in many ways.
What we measure affects how we measure
it.
Measurements can be used to describe,
compare, and make sense of phenomena.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one another to
produce a coherent whole.
Chapter 14 Overview – Fractions (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 whole
 equal parts
 numerator
 denominator
 equivalent fractions
 number line
 simplest form
 benchmark
 like fractions
 unlike fractions
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.G.2
3.NF.1
3.NF.2.a
3.NF.2.b
3.NF.3.a
3.NF.3.b
3.NF.3.c
3.NF.3.d
3.MD.4
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.7
176
Chapter 15 Overview – Customary Length, Weight,
and Capacity
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 13 Days, April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will measure length, mass, and
capacity using customary units and solve real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
Enduring Understandings:
 One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give
a fuller understanding of a problem.
 A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving
depends on choosing wise ways.
 Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
 Context is critical when using
estimation.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 What we measure affects how we
measure it.
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Key Words/Terminology:
 inch
 pound
 half inch
 ton
 foot
 cup
 yard
 pint
 mile
 quart
 ounce
 gallon
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.MD.4
SMP.1
3.MD.7.a
SMP.2
3.MD.7.b
SMP.4
3.MD.7.c
SMP.5
SMP.6
177
Chapter 16 Overview – Time and Temperature
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 11 Days, Apr./May
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will tell time to the nearest minute,
convert time to hours and minutes, add and subtract time, and find elapsed time.
Students will also measure and read temperature and then apply knowledge to realworld problems.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:














How do mathematical ideas interconnect
and build on one another to produce a
coherent whole?
How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or labeling
help to make sense of the world around
us?
What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
How do operations affect numbers?
How do mathematical representations
reflect the needs of society across
cultures?
How can we decide when to use an exact
answer and when to use an estimate?
How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How can patterns, relations, and functions
be used as tools to best describe and help
explain real-life situations?
How are patterns of change related to the
behavior of functions?
How can we use mathematical models to
describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to clarify
mathematical relationships?














178
One representation may sometimes be
more helpful than another; and, used
together, multiple representations give a
fuller understanding of a problem.
A quantity can be represented in various
ways. Problem solving depends on
choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The magnitude of numbers affects the
outcome of operations on them.
In many cases, there are multiple
algorithms for finding a mathematical
solution, and those algorithms are
frequently associated with different cultures.
Context is critical when using estimation.
Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be measured
in many ways.
What we measure affects how we measure
it.
Measurements can be used to describe,
compare, and make sense of phenomena.
The symbolic language of algebra is used
to communicate and generalize patterns in
mathematics.
Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Chapter 16 Overview – Time and Temperature (cont’d.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 hour
 past
 minute
 to
 elapsed time
 time line
 temperature
 thermometer
 degrees
 Fahrenheit
 cold
 cool
 warm
 hot
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.MD.1
3.MD.4
3.MD.7.a
3.MD.7.b
3.MD.7.c
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.4
SMP.5
SMP.6
179
Chapter 17 – Angles and Lines
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, May
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will recognize angles,
perpendicular, and parallel lines. They will explore these elements in plane shapes as
well as three-dimensional real life objects.
Essential Questions:
 How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 How do geometric relationships help us
solve problems and/or make sense of
phenomena?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 What we measure affects how we
measure it.
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Key Words/Terminology:
 point
 line
 end point
 line segment
 angle
 right angle
 greater than
 less than
 perpendicular lines
 parallel lines
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.G.1
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
180
Chapter 18 – Two-Dimensional Shapes
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 8 Days, May/Jun.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn about lines and angles
that lead to the identification of angles and the classification of polygons. Students will
determine the congruency and symmetry of figures based on certain properties.
Essential Questions:
 How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 How do geometric relationships help us
solve problems and/or make sense of
phenomena?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What situations can be analyzed using
transformations and symmetries?
 How can attributes be used to classify
data/objects?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 What we measure affects how we
measure it.
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Shape and area can be conserved
during mathematical transformations.
 Grouping by attributes (classification)
can be used to answer mathematical
questions.
Key Words/Terminology:
 plane figure
 octagon
 open figure
 tangram
 closed figure
 slide
 flip
 polygon
 turn
 vertex
 quadrilateral
 rotate
 parallel
 congruent
 rhombus
 symmetry
 parallelogram
 line of symmetry
 pentagon
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.G.1
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
181
Chapter 19 Overview – Area and Perimeter
Grade: 3
Amount of Time: 11 Days, June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will find the area and perimeter of
figures in metric and customary units. Concepts of area and perimeter will be used to
solve real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
 How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes an algebraic algorithm
both effective and efficient?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
 Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
 What we measure affects how we
measure it.
 Measurements can be used to
describe, compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
 Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
 Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
 Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one
another to produce a coherent whole.
 Algebraic representation can be used
to generalize patterns and
relationships.
Key Words/Terminology:
 area
 square units
 square centimeter
 square inch
 square meter
 square foot
 perimeter
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
3.NBT.2
3.MD.5.a
3.MD.5.b
3.MD.6
3.MD.7.d
3.MD.8
SMP.1
SMP.2
SMP.3
SMP.5
SMP.6
SMP.8
182
Chapter 1 Overview – Place Value of Whole Numbers
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: September
Brief Description of Chapter: Students will extend their learning to 5-digit numbers.
Place value chart is a good way to reinforce such place-value concepts. Once students
are familiar with place value concepts, they will not have too much difficulty comparing
larger numbers up to 100,000, and stating which number is greater and which is less.
Students apply this skill of comparing numbers to order a given set of numbers.
Students are also encouraged to use thinking skills such as identifying patterns and
relationships in number patterns. With these skills, students can find the rule in a
number pattern and then continue the pattern.
Essential Questions:
 What are the various ways we can
represent numbers?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understanding place value of whole
numbers up to 100,000.
 Represent numbers to 100,000 is
various ways.
 Extend understanding of place value to
6-digit numbers.
 Apply understandings of comparing
numbers to larger numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 digit
 place value
 compare
 number pattern
 place-value chart
 ten thousand
 hundred thousand
 standard form
 word form
 expanded form greater than (>)
 less than (<)
 more than
 greatest
 least
 order
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.NBT.1
4.NBT.2
4.NBT.4
4.OA.5
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
183
Chapter 2 Overview – Estimation and Number Theory
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: October
Brief Description of Chapter: Chapter 2 focuses on estimating quickly and accurately
enabling students to assess the reasonableness of their results. Students will learn
various methods of estimating, emphasizing that no one method is “correct”. Number
theory, the study of whole numbers and their properties, will be introduced including
factors, multiples, least common multiples (LCMs) and greatest common factors
(GCFs).
Essential Questions:
 How can we use estimations to
determine if an answer is reasonable?
 How do we determine if estimates or
exact answers are necessary when
solving real world problems?
 How can our understanding of factors
and multiples help us estimate
products and quotients?
Enduring Understandings:
 Finding factors and multiples of
numbers and using them to estimate
products and quotients.
 Using estimation skills to determine if
an answer is reasonable.
 Determining when to use estimates or
exact answers and applying estimation
skills to the real world.
 Use basic multiplication and division
facts to find factors and multiples.
Key Words/Terminology:
 estimate
 prime number
 reasonable
 composite
number
 front-end
estimation
 whole number
 rounding
 multiple
 product
 common multiple
 quotient
 least common
multiple
 factor

consecutive
 common factor
whole numbers
 greatest
common factor
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.NBT.1
4.NBT.2
4.NBT.3
4.NBT.4
4.OA.3
4.OA.4
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.6
184
Chapter 3 Overview – Whole Number Multiplication
and Division
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Oct./Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: Chapter 3 focuses on multiplication and division.
Initially, the place value concept is used to facilitate student understanding of
multiplication and division before they are introduced to the vertical form. Students will
apply their learning to solve real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How can our knowledge of place value
help us multiply and divide numbers?
 How can we use estimation to
determine if an answer is reasonable?
 What is the relationship of
multiplication and division?
Enduring Understandings:
 Using place value to multiply and divide
multi-digit numbers.
 Extend understanding of place value to
multiple and divide numbers.
 Discover that division is the inverse of
multiplication.
 Use estimation to check the
reasonableness of an answer.
Key Words/Terminology:
 round
 estimate
 product
 regroup
 quotient
 remainder
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.NBT.1
4.NBT.2
4.NBT.3
4.NBT.4
4.NBT.5
4.NBT.6
4.OA.1
4.OA.2
4.OA.3
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
CC.K-12.MP.8
185
Chapter 4 Overview – Tables and Line Graphs
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Nov./Dec.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit students will construct tables and graphs as
visual tools for showing and analyzing data. Students will compare, analyze, and
classify data while looking for patterns and trends. Students will be introduced to line
graphs to show how data flows continuously from left to right.
Essential Questions:
 How can we use graphs and tables to
collect, organize and present data?
 How can we use graphs and tables to
analyze data?
Enduring Understandings:
 Showing and analyzing data in graphs
and tables
 Collect and organize data and
representing data in a form that is easy
to read.
 Use four operations of whole numbers
when analyzing data presented in
graphs and table to solve problems.
Key Words/Terminology:
 data
 table
 tally chart
 row
 column
 intersection
 line graph
 horizontal axis
 vertical axis
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.NF.3c
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
186
Chapter 5 Overview – Data and Probability
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Dec./Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on how to use different tools to
analyze data, such as average, median and probability. By applying their
understanding of place value and graphs, students will develop and use stem-and-leaf
plots to find mean, median, mode, and range. Students will learn to express the
probability of an outcome as a fraction and they will be give opportunities to solve realworld problems to check their understanding and make projections based on the data
they are given.
Essential Questions:
 What various tools do we use to
analyze data?
 How is data used to predict outcomes?
Enduring Understandings:
 Use various tools to analyze data.
 Apply understanding of place value and
graphs to develop and use stem-and
leaf plots.
 Use data to predict outcomes.
 Solve real-world problems and apply
understanding of data analysis.
Key Words/Terminology:
 average
 mean
 median
 mode
 range
 line plot
 stem-and-leaf plot
 outlier
 outcome
 certain
 more likely
 equally likely
 less likely
 impossible
 favorable outcome
 probability
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.NF.1
4.OA.3
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
187
Chapter 6 Overview – Fractions and Mixed Numbers
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: January
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on how to add and subtract like and
unlike factions with and without renaming. Fractions of a set and how to apply this
knowledge to solve real-world problems will be introduced. Concrete materials
(manipulatives) are used to illustrate the addition and subtraction of fractions and used
throughout the unit to refer to fractions especially when converting improper fractions to
mixed numbers and vice versa.
Essential Questions:
 How does renaming fractions help us
to compare, contrast, add, and subtract
them?
 What is the relationship between a
fraction and its whole?
Enduring Understandings:
 Naming wholes and parts of a whole
using fractions and mixed numbers.
 Adding and subtracting fractions and
mixed numbers.
 Extend knowledge of multiplication an
division facts to rename improper
fractions and mixed numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 numerator
 denominator
 equivalent fraction
 unlike fraction
 mixed number
 simplest form
 improper fraction
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.MD.1
4.MD.2
4.MD.4
4.NF.1
4.NF.2
4.NF.3a
4.NF.3b
4.NF.3d
4.NF.4a
4.NF.4b
4.NF.4c
4.OA.2
4.OA.3
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
188
Chapter 7 Overview – Decimals
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to recognize, compare, and
round decimals in tenths and hundredths. Decimals will be represented as an extension
of the base-ten system of writing whole numbers. Students will represent numbers less
than 1 and between consecutive numbers. Students are taught how to use money as a
representation of decimals and fractional parts of a whole. The unit will focus on the
connection between equivalent fractions and decimals through models and number
lines.
Essential Questions:
 How can we show the relationship
between a part and a whole with a
decimal?
 What is the relationship between mixed
numbers and decimals?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand decimals as an extension
of place-value notation.
 Amounts are parts of a whole using
decimals.
 Decimal points are used to separate
whole numbers and the fractional part.
Key Words/Terminology:
 tenth
 decimal form
 decimal point
 expanded form
 hundredth
 placeholder zero
 more than
 less than
 greater than
 least
 greatest
 order
 round
 equivalent fraction
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
4.MD.1
4.NBT.1
4.NBT.2
4.NF.6
4.NF.5
4.NF.7
4.OA.5
4.NF.1
4.NF.3a
189
Chapter 8 Overview – Adding and Subtracting
Decimals
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: March
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on adding and subtracting decimals
up to two decimal places. Students will use the algorithms for whole numbers, numbers
aligned vertically, and lining up the decimal points correctly before calculating.
Essential Questions:
 How can you use whole number
algorithms to add and subtract
decimals?
Enduring Understandings:
 Adding and subtracting decimals using
same algorithms as whole numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 decimal
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
4.MD.1
4.MD.2
4.NBT.1
4.NBT.2
4.NBT.4
4.NF.5
4.OA.3
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.7
CC.K-12.MP.8
190
Chapter 9 Overview – Angles
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Mar./Apr.
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on angles and how they are formed
when two rays or sides of a figure meet. Students learn how to estimate angle
measures and measure angles with a protractor. Students will also be introduced to the
degree symbol. They will learn to draw angles to 180°. Students will learn the
relationship between rotations and angles.
Essential Questions:
 How can estimation help us more
accurately measure angle?
 What is the relationship between
fractional turns and angle measures?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand that angles can be seen
and measured when two rays or sides
of a shape meet.
 Angles have measure.
 Protractors are used to measure
angles.
 Fractions of a turn are equivalent to
angle measures.
Key Words/Terminology:
 ray
 vertex
 protractor
 degree
 inner scale
 outer scale
 acute angle
 obtuse angle
 straight angle
 turn
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
4.G.1
4.MD.5
4.MD.5a
4.MD.6
4.MD.7
4.MD.5b
191
Chapter 10 Overview – Perpendicular and Parallel Line
Segments
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Apr./May
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit extends student knowledge of line segments
and continues to explore parallel and perpendicular line segments. Students will learn
to use a protractor or a drawing triangle to draw perpendicular line segments when a
grid is not provided. Students will build on their knowledge of perpendicular and parallel
lines to identify horizontal and vertical lines.
Essential Questions:
 What is the difference between
perpendicular and parallel line
segments?
 What is the difference between
horizontal and vertical lines?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understanding that line segments go
up and down and from side to side in
every direction.
 A drawing triangle can be used to draw
perpendicular and parallel line
segments.
 Identify horizontal and vertical lines.
Key Words/Terminology:
 perpendicular line segments
 drawing triangle
 parallel line segments
 base
 horizontal lines
 vertical lines
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
4.G.1
4.G.2
192
Chapter 11 Overview – Squares and Rectangles
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: Apr./May
Brief Description of Chapter: This unit focuses on the properties of squares and
rectangles. Students will apply their knowledge of angles, perpendicular lines, and
parallel line segments to identify and define squares and rectangles. Students will learn
to break up shapes made up of square and rectangles using concrete materials to
reinforce this concept. Students will also learn to find measures of adjacent angles and
how to find the side lengths of composite figures by using the properties of a square.
Essential Questions:
 What are the properties of squares and
rectangles?
 How can we use squares and
rectangles to find unknown angle
measures and lengths of sides?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understand the properties of squares
and rectangles.
 Identify squares and rectangles based
on properties.
 Shapes can be decomposed into
squares and rectangles.
 Unknown angle measures and side
lengths of figures can be found using
the properties of squares and
rectangles.
Key Words/Terminology:
 square
 right angle
 rectangle
 parallel
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
4.G.2
4.MD.1
4.MD.2
4.OA.3
4.MD.7
193
Chapter 12 Overview – Area and Perimeter
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: May
Brief Description of Chapter: The primary focus of this unit is learning to find the area
and perimeter of figures using formulas. Students learn to connect the model of
counting squares in and around a figure as a model for using the formulas.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:
 How do you find the area of a rectangle  Area and perimeter of a figure can be
using a formula?
found by counting squares or using a
formula.
 How can decomposing figures into
squares and rectangles help us find
 By decomposing figures into squares
unknown lengths of side?
and rectangles, unknown side lengths
of a figure can be found.
Key Words/Terminology:
 length
 width
 composite figure
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.2
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.4
CC.K-12.MP.5
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
CC.K-12.MP.8
4.MD.1
4.MD.2
4.MD.3
4.OA.3
194
Chapter 13 Overview – Symmetry
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: The primary focus of this unit is to identify lines of
symmetry of figures and to make symmetric shapes and patterns. Students will apply
knowledge from previous units on drawing, analyzing, comparing, and classifying twodimensional shapes based on attributes and properties to solve problems involving
congruence and symmetry. Students will experiment with making their own symmetric
figures and identify figures with rotational symmetry.
Essential Questions:
 What is symmetry?
 What is rotational symmetry?
 How can you identify lines of
symmetry?
Enduring Understandings:
 Understanding line symmetry and
rotational symmetry and making
symmetric shapes ad patterns.
 Figures can have symmetry and
rotational symmetry.
 Folding and cutting patterns can be
used to understand line symmetry and
rotational symmetry.
Key Words/Terminology:
 line of symmetry
 symmetric figure
 rotation
 rotational symmetry
 center of rotation
 clockwise
 counter-clockwise
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.6
CC.K-12.MP.7
4.OA.5
4.G.3
195
Chapter 14 Overview – Tessellations
Grade: 4
Amount of Time/Month: June
Brief Description of Chapter: The primary focus of this unit is to recognize
tessellations, identify the repeated shapes used in a tessellation and recognize shapes
that can tessellate. Students will learn to make tessellations with a given shape and
draw tessellations on grid paper.
Essential Questions:
 How do you create a tessellation?
 What does it mean to slide, rotate, and
flip a shape?
Enduring Understandings:
 Identify tessellations as patterns
formed by repeated shapes to cover a
surface without gaps or overlaps.
 Patterns are used to form tessellations.
Key Words/Terminology:
 tessellation
 repeated shape
 slide
 rotate
 flip
 modify
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
CC.K-12.MP.1
CC.K-12.MP.3
CC.K-12.MP.6
4.OA.5
196
Chapter 1 Overview – Whole Numbers
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: September
Brief Description of Chapter: Students learn to represent 6 digit and 7 digit numbers
in three forms. Students will explore place value through comparing and ordering
numbers. Students will recognize the relationship between positive and negative
numbers. In addition, students will estimate sums, differences, products and quotients
through a variety of strategies.
Essential Questions:
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How can we decide when to use an
exact answer and when to use an
estimate?
Enduring Understandings:
 Place value to numbers through
millions in various contexts
 Writing numbers in standard form, word
form, and expanded form
 Notice number patterns by comparing
numbers
 Adopt strategies for estimating
including front-end with adjustment and
number lines
Key Words/Terminology:
 hundred thousand
 standard form
 word form
 periods
 million
 place value
 expanded form
 greater than
 less than
 round
 estimate
 front end estimation with adjustment
 compatible numbers
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NBT.1
197
Chapter 2 Overview – Whole Number Multiplication
and Division
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: Oct./Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: Students will learn the basic functions of a calculator,
multiply and divide using patterns and conventional algorithms, simplify numeric
expressions using the order of operations and solve real-world problems involving
multiplication and division. Students will also understand and apply the Distributive and
Associative Properties of Multiplication.
Essential Questions:
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 Use a calculator to perform the four
operations on whole numbers.
 Multiply numbers by 10, 100, 1000
using patterns and multiply numbers up
to 4 digits by 2 digit numbers using
conventional algorithms.
 Round numbers to estimate products
and use them to check the
reasonableness of their answers.
 Divide numbers by 10, 100, 1000 using
patterns and divide numbers up to 4
digits by 2 digit numbers using
conventional algorithms.
 Explore the inverse relationship of
multiplication and division.
 Simplify numeric expressions using the
order of operations
 Solve real world multiplication and
division problems using tools and
strategies including bar models and
organized lists.
Key Words/Terminology:
 product
 factor
 quotient
 dividend
 divisor
 remainder
 numeric expression
 order of operations
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.OA.1
5.OA.2
5.OA.3
5.NBT.1
5.NBT.2
5.NBT.5
5.NBT.6
198
Chapter 3 Overview – Fractions and Mixed Numbers
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: October
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn to add and subtract
unlike fractions and mixed numbers. Students will also learn the relationships between
fractions, mixed numbers, division expressions and decimals.
Essential Questions:
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Add and subtract unlike fractions and
mixed numbers by rewriting them with
like denominators.
 Explore the relationships and
equivalences among fractions, mixed
numbers, division expressions, and
decimals, before they add and subtract
mixed numbers.
 Translate real world problems into
division expressions and solve them.
Key Words/Terminology:
 multiple
 least common multiple
 least common denominator
 equivalent fractions
 benchmark
 division expression
 mixed number
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NF.1
5.NF.2
5.NF.3
199
Chapter 4 Overview – Multiplying and Dividing
Fractions and Mixed Numbers
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: November
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn how to multiply and divide
whole numbers, proper fractions, improper fractions and mixed numbers in any
combination. Students will apply these strategies to solve real world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
 What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
Enduring Understandings:
 Multiplying proper fractions using
models and apply to real world
problems.
 Multiply an improper by an improper or
proper fraction, a mixed number by a
whole number, and apply to real world
problems.
 Divide a fraction by a whole number
and apply to real world problems.
Key Words/Terminology:
 product
 common factor
 proper fraction
 improper fraction
 mixed number
 reciprocal
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NF.4a
5.NF.4b
5.NF.5a
5.NF.6
5.NF.7.a
5.NF.7.c
200
Chapter 5 Overview – Algebra
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn to write both numerical
and algebraic expressions and equations that correspond to given situations. They will
also learn to simplify and evaluate expressions, and use expressions, inequalities, and
equations to solve real-world problems. They will learn that variables represent
numbers whose exact values are not yet specified.
Essential Questions:
 How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Use algebraic expressions to describe
situations and solve real-world
problems.
 Simplify and evaluate the expressions
to solve problems.
Key Words/Terminology:
 numerical expression
 variable
 algebraic expression
 evaluate
 simplify
 like terms
 inequality
 equation
 true
 equality properties
 solve
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.OA.1
5.OA.2
201
Chapter 6 Overview – Area of a Triangle
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: December
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn that base and height are
measurements obtained from a triangle. These measurements can be used to find the
area of the triangle. Students compare the area of a triangle with the area of its
corresponding rectangle. Using the area of a rectangle, they define the formula for the
area of a triangle. Students apply their knowledge that area is the amount of space
covered by a particular region.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Explore various types of triangles.
 Introduce the idea of finding a base
and a corresponding perpendicular
height of any given triangle.
 Apply knowledge of the base and
height pair to find the area of a triangle,
including using area of the
corresponding rectangle.
Key Words/Terminology:
 vertex
 side
 angle
 base
 height
 perpendicular
 area
 right triangle
 acute triangle
 obtuse triangle
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.G.3
5.G.4
202
Chapter 7 Overview – Ratio
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: January
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn to compare two numbers
by using division and express this comparison as a ratio. They apply the concepts of
equivalent ratios, part-whole, part-part, and whole-part comparisons to solve one and
two step problems involving ratios.
Essential Questions:
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
Enduring Understandings:
 Compare the relative sizes of two
numbers or quantities using ratios
(division).
 Use equivalent ratios to find the
simplest form of a ratio and missing
terms in a ratio and apply these skills to
solve real-world problems.
 Express ratios in fraction form.
Key Words/Terminology:
 ratio
 term
 equivalent ratios
 simplest form
 greatest common factor
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NF.5.a
5.NBT
203
Chapter 8 Overview – Decimals
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: January
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students will learn how to read and write
decimals through thousandths, identify the relationship between fractions and decimals,
compare and order decimals, and round decimals to the nearest hundredth. They will
recognize that decimals are another way of writing fractions or mixed numbers. In
addition, they will learn that the decimal notation is an extension of the base-ten system
of whole numbers.
Essential Questions:
 How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
Enduring Understandings:
 Represent thousandths as three-place
decimals or as fractions.
 Compare and order decimals to three
places.
Key Words/Terminology:
 thousandths
 equivalent
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NBT.1
5.NBT.3.a
5.NBT.3.b
5.NBT.4
5.NBT.7
204
Chapter 9 Overview – Multiplying and Dividing
Decimals
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: February
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students use patterns to help them multiply
and divide decimals by 1-digit whole numbers, tens, hundred, and thousands. Students
make reasonable estimates of decimal sums, differences, products, and quotients.
Students will extend their knowledge of multiplication and division of whole numbers to
the multiplication and division of decimals. Connections will be made to the base-ten
system. Real-world problems involving measurement and money will be explored.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How do operations affect numbers?
 How is place value through the baseten system represented in decimal
form?
Enduring Understandings:
 Multiplying and dividing decimals.
Key Words/Terminology:
 Dividend
 Per unit
 Estimate
 Divisor
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NBT.2
5.NBT.1
5.NBT.4
5.NBT.7
5.NF.5.b
205
Chapter 10 Overview – Percent
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: Feb./Mar.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are introduced to the concept of
percent. They learn that a percent can be expressed as a fraction with a denominator
of 100 and study the relation between fractions, decimals, and percents. They find the
percent of a number and solve real-world problems involving percent including concepts
such as sales tax, meals tax, discount, and interest.
Essential Questions:
 How do mathematical ideas
interconnect and build on one another
to produce a coherent whole?
 How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 Learn the meaning of percent and the
relationships between percents,
fractions, and decimals.
 Find the percent of a number and solve
real-world problems involving percent,
including those involving sales tax,
meals tax, discount, and interest.
Key Words/Terminology:
 percent
 sales tax
 meals tax
 discount
 interest
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.NF
206
Chapter 11 Overview – Graphs and Probability
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to make and interpret double
bar graphs, as well as graph linear equations on coordinate grids. Students learn to find
and compare experimental and theoretical probabilities.
Essential Questions:
 How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
 How can experimental and theoretical
probabilities be used to make
predictions or draw conclusions?
 How can you determine the likelihood
of an outcome based on possible
combinations?
Enduring Understandings:
 Displaying data in a graph highlights
some features of the data.
 Probability measures the likelihood of
an event occurring.
Key Words/Terminology:
 double bar graph  straight line
graph
 key
 equation
 coordinate grid
 combinations
 x-axis
 organized list
 y-axis
 tree diagram
 coordinate
planes
 favorable
outcome
 coordinates
 theoretical
 ordered pair
probability
 x-coordinate
 experimental
 y-coordinate
probability
 origin
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.G.1
5.G.2
5.MD.2
5.MD.1
207
Chapter 15 Overview – Surface Area and Volume
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students build solids using unit cubes, draw
cubes and rectangular prisms on dot paper, find the surface areas of cubes and prisms,
and find the volumes of cubes, rectangular prisms and liquids in rectangular containers.
Students learn to recognize area and volume as an attribute of two-dimensional and
three-dimensional space respectively.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we use geometrical models to
describe physical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Finding the surface area of prisms and
the volumes of rectangular prisms, and
relating these volumes to liquid
measures.
Key Words/Terminology:
 unit cube
 surface area
 right triangle
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.MD.1
5.MD.3.a
5.MD.3.b
5.MD.4
5.MD.5.a
5.MD.5.b
5.MD.5.c
5.NBT.5
208
Chapter 12 Overview – Angles
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: April
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students are introduced to the properties of
angles on a line, angles at a point, and vertical angles. Students will practice measuring
angles, as well as drawing them to scale. In addition, students will see the relevance of
angles in their daily lives.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 The sum of angle measures on a line is
180 degrees.
 The sum of angle measures at a point
is 360 degrees.
 Vertical angles have equal measures.
Key Words/Terminology:
 angles on a line
 angles at a point
 intersecting lines
 vertical angles
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.MD
209
Chapter 13 Overview –
Properties of Triangles and Four-sided Figures
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn the properties of triangles
and four-sided figures. They learn to identify special triangles such as right, isosceles,
and equilateral triangles characterized by angle measures or side lengths. They learn
that the sum of three angle measures in a triangle is 180 degrees. Students build on
their knowledge of squares and rectangles by extending to parallelograms, rhombuses,
and trapezoids.
Essential Questions:
 How can measurements be used to
solve problems?
 How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
 How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
Enduring Understandings:
 Properties of geometric figures state
relationships among angles or sides of
the figures.
 Triangles and four-sided figures have
their own special properties.
Key Words/Terminology:
 equilateral triangle
 isosceles triangle
 scalene triangle
 right triangle
 obtuse triangle
 acute triangle
 parallelogram
 rhombus
 trapezoid
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.G
210
Chapter 14 Overview – Three-Dimensional Shapes
Grade: 5
Amount of Time/Month: May/June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this unit, students learn to recognize threedimensional solid shapes and identify nets that can form some of these solids. The
solids emphasized in this unit are prisms, pyramids, cylinders and cones.
Essential Questions:
 How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
 How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Enduring Understandings:
 Identifying and classifying solid figures
by the number of faces, edges, and
vertices.
 Identifying nets of prisms, pyramids
and cylinders.
Key Words/Terminology:
 face
 base
 edge
 vertex
 prism
 rectangular prism
 triangular prism
 pyramid
 square pyramid
 triangular pyramid
 net
 cylinder
 sphere
 cone
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
5.MD
211
Math Pacing Guide: Grades 6-8
September
October
November
Grade 6
Chapter 1: Positive
Numbers and the
Number Line
Chapter 2: Negative
Numbers and the
Number Line
Chapter 3: Multiplying
and Dividing Fractions
and Decimals
Chapter 4: Ratio
December
Chapter 5: Rates
January
Chapter 6: Percent
February
March
Chapter 7: Algebraic
Expressions
Chapter 9-12: The
Coordinate Plane, Area of
Polygons, Circumference
and Area of a Circle,
Surface Area and Volume
of Solids
Chapter 14:
Measures of Central
Tendency
April
May
Grade 7
Grade 8
Chapter 1: The Real
Number System
Chapter 1: Exponents
Chapter 2: Scientific
Notation
Chapter 2: Rational
Number Operations
Chapter 6: Angle
Proportions and
Straight Lines
Chapter 5: Systems of
Linear Equations
Chapter 4: Algebraic
Equations and
Inequalities
Chapter 9-12
Chapter 6: Functions
Chapter 7: The
Pythagorean Theorem
Chapter 5: Direct and
Inverse Proportions
Chapter 8: Geometric
Transformations
Chapter 7: Geometric
Construction
Chapter 9:
Congruence and
Similarity
Chapter 8: Volume
and Surface Area of
Solids
Chapter 10: Statistics
Chapter 9: Statistics
June
Chapter 4: Lines and
Linear Equations
Chapter 3: Algebraic
Equations
Chapter 8: Equations
and Inequalities
Chapter 13:
Introduction to
Statistics
Chapter 3: Algebraic
Linear Equations
Chapter 10:
Probability
Chapter 11:
Probability
The above timeline is to be used as a guideline to provide a “snapshot” of the year at a glance.
212
Overview of Mathematics Chapters: Grades 6-8
213
Chapter 1 Overview – Positive Numbers and the
Number Line
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Sept.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big ideas in this chapter are whole numbers,
fractions, and decimals are numbers that can be represented in multiple ways.
Essential Questions:
 How do you represent numbers on a
number line?
 How do you write statements of
inequality? (<,>,=)
 How can we identify prime numbers?
 How do you find factors and multiples
of a whole number?
 How can we use the order of
operations to simplify a numerical
expression?
 How can we use geometric models to
show exponents, i.e. squares and
cubes?
Enduring Understandings:
 A number line will help students
compare positive and negative numbers
and will show the relative value.
 Students will recall that prime numbers
have only two factors, itself and 1.
 A multiple of a number is the product of
that number and any other whole
number.
 The knowledge of prime factorization
will allow students to find the greatest
common factor and least common
multiple.
Key Words/Terminology:
 base of an exponent
 common factors
 common multiples
 composite numbers
 cube
 cube root
 greatest common factor
 least common multiple
 order of operations
 perfect cube
 perfect square
 positive/negative number
 square root
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.NS.4
6.NS.6
6.NS.7a
6.EE.1
6.EE.2c
8.EE.2
214
Chapter 2 Overview – Negative Numbers and the
Number Line
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Sept.-Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big ideas in this chapter focus on the following:
Negative numbers are the opposites of positive numbers. For every positive number,
there is a corresponding negative number. Students can write statements of equality
using the number line.
Essential Questions:
 How do you recognize positive and
negative numbers in real-world
situations?
 How do you represent numbers on a
number line?
 How do you use the symbols <,>, = to
compare numbers?
 How do we use absolute values to
interpret real-world situations?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will represent and compare
positive and negative numbers on a
number line.
 Students will understand that every nonzero number has an opposite.
 Absolute value represents the distance
a number is away from zero. The
students realize it can not be a negative
number unless it is zero.
Key Words/Terminology:
 absolute value
 negative number
 opposite
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.NS.6
6.NS.6a
6.NS.7a
6.NS 7b
6.NS.7c
215
Chapter 3 Overview – Multiplying and Dividing
Fractions and Decimals
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Oct,
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea in this chapter is whole number concepts
can be extended to fractions and decimals when more precise calculations are needed.
The students add and subtract decimals, express improper fractions as mixed numbers
and the reverse concept. The students also practice multiplying a fraction by another
fraction.
Essential Questions:
 How do you divide a whole number by
a fraction, fraction by fraction, and a
fraction by an improper fraction or a
mixed number?
 How do you multiply tenths and
hundredths by a whole number, tenths
by tenths, and decimals by decimals?
 How do you divide a whole number by
a decimal with one decimal place, with
two decimal places?
 How do you divide tenths by tenths,
hundredths by hundredths and
hundredths by tenths?
 How can you multiply and divide
decimals to solve real-world
problems?
 How can you divide a whole number
by a fraction to solve multi-step
problems?
 How to decide which is more
appropriate, rounding up or rounding
down?
Enduring Understandings:
 Two numbers whose product equals 1
are called reciprocals
 Dividing a number is the same as
multiplying by the reciprocal of that
number.
 Before finding the reciprocal of a whole
number or a mixed number, you first
need to write it as an improper fraction.
 Commutative property of multiplication
states that two or more numbers can be
multiplied in any order.
 When finding multiples using a number
line, recall that zero is not a multiple and
that one must count the number of
jumps, not count the starting point.
 Add the number of decimal places in the
factors to decide how many decimal
places the product will have.
 When dividing decimals students will
understand that the dividend and the
divisor must be multiplied by the same
multiple of ten. (The decimal points
must be moved the same number of
places to the right.)
Key Words/Terminology:
 interval (p.89)
 reciprocal
 tenths, hundredths, thousandths
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.NS.1
6.NS.2
6.NS.3
216
Chapter 4 Overview – Ratios
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea in this chapter is to use a ratio to compare
two quantities and to use ratios to solve problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do you use ratio to describe a
relationship between two quantities?
 How do we use the concept of unit
rate to determine value of one?
 How can we use tables to show
equivalent ratios and missing values in
the table?
 How can students determine the
unknown value in a proportion?
 How can we use ratio reasoning to
convert units?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students must understand that the order
of terms in ratios matters.
 Ratios must be changed to equivalent
ratios in order to get a common term.
 You can write equivalent ratios by
multiplying or dividing the terms of a
ratio by the same factor.
 A pair of equivalent ratios forms a
proportion.
 When comparing measurement
quantities in ratios, both quantities must
be expressed using the same units. i.e.,
convert millimeters to centimeters, feet
to inches, etc.
 Use division to determine a unit rate.
 To find a missing term in a proportion,
multiply the known values divided by the
unknown.
Key Words/Terminology:
 equivalent ratios
 proportion
 ratio
 simplest form of a ratio
 term of a ratio
 unitary method/unit rate (p.140)
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.RP.1
6.RP.3
6.RP.3a
6.RP.3d
217
Chapter 5 Overview – Rates
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Dec.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea in this chapter is to use a rate to compare
one quantity to another quantity and to use rates to solve problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do you express and compute unit
rates?
 How can you calculate a unit rate?
 How do you compare unit rates?
 How can you find the speed or rate of
travel of a moving object?
Enduring Understandings:
 You can use a rate to compare two
quantities of different units.
 You can use a unit rate to compare a
quantity to one unit of a different
quantity.
 To find a unit rate one must use
division.
 Distance = rate x time.
 When it comes to wise purchasing
decisions, shoppers should consider
value not just price.
 When converting measurement units,
always convert to the simplest form i.e.,
1 hour = 60 minutes, use the minutes.
Key Words/Terminology:
 average speed
 rate
 speed
 unit rate
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.NS.1
6.NS.2
6.RP.1
6.RP.2
6.RP.3
6.RP3b
6.RP.3d
218
Chapter 6 Overview – Percent
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea of this chapter is that percents are used to
compare quantities expressed per hundred.
Essential Questions:
 What is the meaning of percent?
 How do you find the percent
represented by a fraction by
multiplying 100%?
 How can you express a decimal as a
percent?
 How can you express a percent as a
fraction?
 How do you find the quantity
represented by the percent?
 How do you find the whole given a
quantity and its percent?
 How do you solve real-world problems
using sales tax, commission, interest
and interest rate?
 How can we solve word problems
involving taxes and interest?
 How do we solve problems involving
markup and discount?
Enduring Understandings:
 Find a percent of a quantity as a rate
per 100.
 A percent is a part-whole comparison in
which the whole is divided into 100
equal parts.
 100% is the same value as 1.
 Solve problems involving finding the
whole, given a part and the percent.
 Multiply by a decimal by 100 to find the
percent.
 When given a fraction divide the
numerator by the denominator and
multiply by 100.
 You can use models to find a percent of
a quantity or a percent change.
Key Words/Terminology:
 base (of a percent)
 commission
 discount
 interest
 markup
 percent
 sales tax
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.RP.3
6.RP3c
7.RP.3
219
Chapter 7 Overview – Algebraic Expressions
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea of this chapter is algebraic expressions
can be used to describe situations and real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do you use a variable to
represent unknown numbers?
 How do you use a variable to write
addition and subtraction expressions?
 How do you use a variable to write
multiplication and division?
 How are algebraic expressions
evaluated for given values of the
variable?
 How can you simplify algebraic
expressions?
 How do you use the distributive
property to expand algebraic
expressions?
 How can you solve real-world
problems using algebraic
expressions?
Enduring Understandings:
 A letter or variable in an algebraic
expression represents an unknown
specific number.
 Write, read and evaluate expressions
where letters stand for numbers.
 Identify parts of an expression using
mathematic terms.
 Expanding and factoring are inverse
operations.
 Evaluate expressions at specific values
of their values.
 Apply the properties of operations to
generate equivalent expressions.
 Use variables to solve real-world
problems.
Key Words/Terminology:
 algebraic expression
 coefficient
 equivalent expression
 evaluate
 expand
 factor
 like terms
 simplify
 substitute
 term
 variable
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.EE.2a.b.c.
6.EE.2
6.EE.2c
6.EE.3
6.EE.4
6.EE.6
220
Chapter 9 Overview – The Coordinate Plane
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: March & June
Brief Description of Chapter: Every point on the coordinate plane can be represented
by a pair of coordinates. Students apply this concept to graph real world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do you find the coordinates of
points on a coordinate plane?
 How do you find the lengths of line
segments on the x and y axis?
 How can we graph an equation on the
coordinate plane?
Enduring Understandings:
 The x and y axis divide the coordinate
plane into four quadrants.
 The quadrants are called I, II, III, and IV.
 Each point on a coordinate plane can
be located by using an ordered pair
(x, y).
 For any point the x coordinate tells how
far to the left or the right of the origin the
point is relative to the x-axis.
 For any point the y coordinate tells how
far up or down of the origin the point is
relative to the y-axis.
 Points to the left of the y-axis have a
negative x coordinate.
 Points below the x-axis have a negative
y coordinate.
 A straight line graph is also called a
linear graph.
 A linear equation has a straight line
graph.
Key Words/Terminology:
 coordinates
 coordinate plane
 linear graph
 quadrant
 x-axis
 y-axis
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.G.3
6.NS.6
6.NS.6c
6.NS.7
6.NS7c
6.NS.8
6.RP.3b
221
Chapter 10 Overview – Area of Polygons
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: March & June
Brief Description of Chapter: The area of a polygon can be found by dividing it into
smaller shapes and then adding the areas of those shapes.
Essential Questions:
 How can you derive the formula for
triangles and parallelograms,
trapezoids?
 How do we find the areas of regular
polygons?
 How can we recognize that a plane
figure can be divided into other
polygons?
Enduring Understandings:
 The area of a triangle is ½ bh.
 The area of a parallelogram is bh.
 The area of a trapezoid is ½ h(b1+b2).
 Any polygon can be divided into
triangles.
 You can find the area of the polygon by
calculating the sum of the areas of all
the triangles (triangulation).
 Composite figures can be divided into
shapes such as triangles,
parallelograms, and trapezoids.
Key Words/Terminology:
 base of a triangle
 composite figures
 formula
 height
 regular polygon
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.G.1
6.G3
6.EE.2c
222
Chapter 11 Overview – Circumference and Area of a
Circle
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: March & June
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea is that a circle is a geometric figure that
has many useful applications in the real world.
Essential Questions:
 How do you identify: the center, the
radius, diameter, circumference of a
circle?
 How can you recognize that half of a
circle is a semicircle and that quarter
of a circle is a quadrant?
 How do we find the lengths of a
semicircular arc and the arc of a
quadrant?
 How can we use the formula for
circumference and are of a circle to
solve real-world problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 All radii of a circle are equal.
 Diameter of a circle is twice it’s radius.
 The number π is the ratio of the
circumference to the diameter of a
circle.
Key Words/Terminology:
 arc
 center
 circumference
 compass
 diameter
 pi (π)
 protractor
 quadrant of a circle
 radii
 radius
 semicircle
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.NS.3
6.EE.1
6.EE.2c
7.G.1
7.G.4
223
Chapter 12 Overview – Surface Area and Volume of
Solids
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: March & June
Brief Description of Chapter: The big ideas in this chapter are the following: area is
measured in square units and volume is measured in cubic units and the surface area
of a prism or a pyramid is the sum of the areas of its faces. The volume of a prism is
the area of its base times its height.
Essential Questions:
 How do you recognize the net of a
cube, rectangular prism, triangular
prism and square pyramid?
 How can you find the surface area of a
cube, rectangular prism, triangular
prism, and pyramid?
 How do you derive and use the
formula for the volume of rectangular
prism?
 How do we form cross sections of
prisms?
 How can we use a formula to find the
volume of any prism?
Enduring Understandings:
 The volume of a rectangular prism is the
product of its length, width, and height.
 The volume of a prism is the product of
its base and its height.
 The surface area of a prism or pyramid
is the sum of the areas of its faces.
Key Words/Terminology:
 cross section
 net
 prism
 pyramid
 surface area
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.EE.1
6.EE.2c
6.G.2
6.G.4
224
Chapter 14 Overview – Measures of Central Tendency
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: March
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea in this chapter is measures of central
tendency can be used to summarize data distributions and help you make decisions in
real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How do you understand and find the
three measures of central tendency?
 How do you decide whether to use
mean, median and mode?
Enduring Understandings:
 The three measures of central tendency
are mean, median and mode.
 Each measure is a single number
summarizing all the values in the data
set.
 Mode is most useful in describing nonnumeric data.
 Mean and median are both used to
describe the center of a set of numeric
data.
 The mean gives more weight to outliers
and extreme values than the median
does.
 In a skewed distribution median and
mode will be close together, but the
mean will move toward the outliers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 mean
 median
 mode
 outlier
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.SP.2
6.SP.3
6.SP4
6.SP.5
6.SP.5a,c,d
225
Chapter 8 Overview – Equations and Inequalities
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: Apr.
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea in this chapter is equations and
inequalities can be used to describe situations and solve real-world problems.
Essential Questions:
 How can we use substitution, addition,
subtraction and division to solve
algebraic equations?
 How do we write a linear equation to
represent a given situation?
 How can we use tables and graphs to
represent linear equations?
 How can we determine solutions for
inequalities?
 How do we write algebraic equations
to solve real-world problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Equations can be solved by substitution,
by adding, subtracting, multiplying, and
dividing each side of the equation by the
same nonzero number.
 The solution of an equation is a value or
values that make the equation true.
 A linear equation has a dependent and
independent variable.
 The solution of an inequality is a set of
values that makes the inequality true.
 An inequality can be solved by
substitution or by graphing on a number
line.
Key Words/Terminology:
 dependent variable
 equation
 inequality
 linear equations
 independent variable
 solution
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.EE.2a
6.EE2c
6.EE.5
6.EE.7
6.EE.8
6.EE.9
226
Chapter 13 Overview – Introduction to Statistics
Grade: 6
Amount of Time/Month: May
Brief Description of Chapter: The big idea is to know how and why statistics are
collected.
Essential Questions:
 How can you collect and tabulate
data?
 How do you represent data using a
line plot?
 What does the shape of a set of data
tell us?
 How do you represent numerical data
using a histogram?
 How do you choose an appropriate
interval to organize data?
 How do you interpret data from a
distribution?
Enduring Understandings:
 Statistical questions need many pieces
of data to answer
 The answers to statistical questions
require collecting and organizing data.
 Organized data can show patterns of
shape, range, outliers and symmetry.
 The results of statistical investigation
can be used to support or refute an
argument.
Key Words/Terminology:
 dot plot
 frequency
 histogram
 outlier
 range
 skewed
 symmetrical
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
6.SP.1
6SP.2
6.SP.4
6.SP.5
6.SP.5a,b,d.
227
Chapter 1 Overview- The Real Number System
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 17 days/ Sept.Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: Real numbers are represented as points on an infinite
line and are used to count, measure, estimate, or approximate quantities.
Essential Questions:
 How are rational numbers represented
on a number line?
 How can rational numbers be written?
 What are irrational numbers?
 What is The Real Number System?
 Why are significant digits meaningful
to mathematics?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand the size and
value of rational/irrational numbers, and
where they would fall on a number line.
 Students will understand how to change
the form of a rational number into
fractions.
 Irrational numbers can be characterized
by non-terminating and non-repeating
decimals.
 The number system includes both
rational and irrational numbers.
 Students will learn how to identify
leading and trailing zeros while applying
the rules to determine which digits are
significant.
Key Words/Terminology:
 approximate
 irrational number
 negative integers
 opposites
 positive integers
 rational number
 real number
 real number line
 repeating decimal
 set of integers
 significant digits
 terminating decimals
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.NS.1
7.NS.2d
228
Chapter 2 Overview- Rational Number Operations
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 32 days/ Oct.Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: The operations of addition, subtraction, multiplication
and division can be applied to rational numbers including negative numbers.
Essential Questions:
 How can operations with rational
numbers be applied in the real-world?
 How do you apply the order of
operations with rational numbers?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students can use a variety of methods,
including number lines, absolute values,
and algorithms to add or subtract
integers, rational numbers, and decimal
numbers.
 Students will be able to apply the rules
of addition, subtraction, multiplication
and division, with or without a number
line.
 Students will learn how to apply
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and
division operations in the correct order
with integers.
 Students will extend the same rules to
all rational numbers.
Key Words/Terminology:
 additive inverse
 complex fraction
 least common denominator
 zero pair
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.NS.1
7. NS.1a
7.NS.1c
7.NS.d
7.NS.2
7.NS.2a
7.NS.2b
7.NS.2c
7.NS.3
229
Chapter 6 Overview – Angle Properties and Straight
Lines
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 5 days/ Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: Angles formed on a straight line, or by parallel lines and
a transversal, have special properties that are useful in solving problems.
Essential Questions:
 What relationships exist between
different types of angles?
 What relationship exists between the
angles in quadrilaterals and triangles?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand the rules of
supplementary, adjacent,
complementary, vertical, interior,
exterior, and corresponding angles.
 Students will understand the sum of all
angles that meet at a point will equal
360 degrees.
 Students will understand that the sum of
all angles that form a line will equal 180
degrees.
 Students will understand that the sum of
the interior angles of a triangle equals
180 degrees.
 Students will understand that the
measure of an exterior angle of a
triangle is equal to the sum of the
measures of the interior angles that are
not adjacent to the exterior angle.
Key Words/Terminology:
 adjacent angles
 alternate exterior angles
 alternate interior angles
 complementary angles
 congruent angles
 corresponding angles
 exterior angles
 interior angles
 supplementary angles
 transversal
 vertical angles
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.G.2
7.G.5
230
Chapter 3 Overview – Algebraic Expressions
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 32 days/ Dec.Jan.
Brief Description of Chapter: Algebraic expressions containing rational numbers and
several variables can be simplified, expanded, or factored to write equivalent
expressions.
Essential Questions:
 How can algebraic terms be
simplified?
 How can algebraic expressions be
written in different forms?
 How are word problems written in
symbolic form with use of variables
and coefficients?
 How do you apply algebraic reasoning
to real-world problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand algebraic
expressions may contain more than one
variable with rational coefficients, and
rational constants.
 Students will use the commutative
property with like terms.
 Students will understand how to expand
an algebraic expression with the use of
the distributive property.
 Students will understand how to factor
an algebraic expression.
Key Words/Terminology:
No new vocabulary; however, the ELL
section on page TE 133 (like terms) is a
vocabulary term that all students will need
to define.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.EE.1
7.EE.2
7.EE.3
231
Chapter 4 Overview – Algebraic Equations and
Inequalities
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 24 days/ Jan.Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: Algebraic equations and inequalities can be used to
model mathematical or real world situations and to find the values of variables.
Essential Questions:
 How can algebraic equations be
written in separate forms to represent
the same solution?
 What methods can be used to create
and solve algebraic equations or
inequalities to address real-world
problems?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand equations with
the same solution are called equivalent
equations.
 Students will solve an equation by
isolating the variable on one side of the
equation by writing a series of
equivalent equations.
 Students will use an inequality symbol
to compare two quantities that are not
equal or may not be equal.
 Students will understand that the
orientation of the inequality symbol must
be reversed when both sides of an
inequality are multiplied or divided by
the same negative number.
Key Words/Terminology:
 equivalent equations
 solutions set
 equivalent inequalities
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.EE.4
7.EE.4a
7.EE.4b
232
Chapter 5 Overview – Direct and Inverse Proportions
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 19 days/ MarchApril
Brief Description of Chapter: Two quantities that are in a proportional relationship
can be used to solve real-world and mathematical problems.
Essential Questions:
 What are the similarities and
difference between direct and inverse
proportions?
 What are the different representations
of direct and inverse proportions?
 What methods can be used to solve
direct and indirect proportions?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand the algebraic
equation for a direct proportion is y=kx,
or y/x= k.
 Students will understand graphing a
direct proportion is always a straight line
that passes through the orgin, (0,0); but
does not lie on an axis.
 Students will understand the algebraic
equation for an inverse proportion is
xy=k, or y=k/x.
 Students will understand how to graph
an inverse proportion knowing that it is a
curve that never crosses the horizontal
and vertical axes.
Key Words/Terminology:
 constant of proportionality
 cross product
 direct proportion
 inverse proportion
 proportion
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.RP.2
7.RP.2a
7.RP.2b
7.RP.2c
7 RP.2d
7.RP.3
233
Chapter 7 Overview – Geometric Construction
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 6 days/ May
Brief Description of Chapter: Triangles and quadrilaterals can be constructed using a
compass, a protractor, and a straightedge.
Essential Questions:
 What methods can be applied to
construct geometric figures?
 How can a scale drawing be used to
determine the size of a real world
object?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will understand the constraints
of angle bisectors and perpendicular
bisectors.
 Students will be able to draw 2 and 3
dimensional figures.
 Students will understand the properties
of triangles and quadrilaterals.
 Students will understand the properties
of enlargements and reductions in scale
drawings.
Key Words/Terminology:
 bisect
 bisector
 equidistant
 included angle
 included side
 midpoint
 perpendicular bisector
 scale
 scale factor
 straightedge
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.G.1
7.G.2
234
Chapter 8 Overview – Volume and Surface Area of
Solids
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 9 days/ May
Brief Description of Chapter: Solids such as pyramids, cylinders, cones, and spheres
are all around you. You can find their surface areas and volumes to solve real-world
problems.
Essential Questions:
 What methods are used to recognize if
a net can be constructed into a 3D
solid?
 How can you determine the volume
and surface area of 3D solids?
 How to identify and determine the
properties of composite solids in the
real-world?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will be able manipulate,
visualize, model construction of nets
into 3D solids.
 Students will be able to know and use
the formulas of volume and surface
areas for 3D shapes.
 Students will identify the volume or
surface area of a composite solid by
identifying the solids that make it up. By
finding the volume or surface area of
each solid, and then adding or
subtracting they will find the total
composite.
Key Words/Terminology:
 cylinder
 cone
 cross section
 hemisphere
 lateral surface
 plane
 slant height
 sphere
 surface area
 volume
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.G.3
7.G.4
7.G.6
235
Chapter 9 Overview – Statistics
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 7 days/ MayJune
Brief Description of Chapter: Measures of central tendency can be used to estimate
the center of data. Measures of variation estimate how far data are spread from the
center. These measures are used to draw conclusions about populations.
Essential Questions:
 What organizational methods can be
used to interpret statistical data?
 What are ways of achieving accurate
samples of a population, and what
inferences can be drawn based upon
this information?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will develop methods of
organizing statistical data such as;
tables, box and whisker plots, & stem
and leaf plots.
 Students will develop an understanding
of investigating median through the use
of quartiles.
 Students will develop a stronger
understanding of random sampling
methods.
Key Words/Terminology:
 biased sample
 box plot
 box and whisker plot
 first quartile
 inference
 interquartile range
 leaf
 lower quartile
 mean absolute deviation
 measure of variation
 population random sample
 range
 sample
 sample size
 second quartile
 simple random sampling
 stem
 stem and leaf plot
 stratified random sampling
 systematic random sampling
 third quartile
 unbiased sample
 upper quartile
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.SP.1
7.SP.2
7.SP.3
7.SP.4
236
Chapter 10 Overview – Probability
Grade: 7
Amount of Time/Month: 5 days/ June
Brief Description of Chapter: Events happen around you every day, some more likely
than others. You can use probability to describe how likely an event is to occur.
Essential Questions:
 What processes can be used to define
outcomes, events, and sample space?
 What are the ways of finding probability
of events?
 How can probability models help to
simplify real-world events?
Enduring Understandings:
 Students will identify outcomes of
events to determine theoretical
probability.
 Students will use data to determine
experimental probability.
 Students will create probability models.
Key Words/Terminology:
 biased
 complementary event
 event
 experimental probability
 fair
 mutually exclusive
 non-uniform probability mod
 observed frequency
 outcomes
 probability
 probability distribution
 probability model
 relative frequency
 sample space
 theoretical probability
 uniform probability model
 Venn diagram
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.SP.5
7.SP.6
7.SP.7
7.SP.8
7.SP.8a
7.SP.8b
7.SP.8c
237
Chapter 1 Overview – Exponents
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 19 days/ Sept.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students learn to use exponential
notation. After learning the product of powers property and the quotient of powers
property, they multiply and divide expressions in exponential notation. Students learn
how to raise a power to a power, are introduced to the power of a product property and
the power of a quotient property. All these properties are built upon the foundational
definition of exponents and the product and quotient of powers properties.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:


How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
Key Words/Terminology:
 exponent
 exponential notation
 power
 prime factorization
A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving depends
on choosing wise ways.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.NS.1
8.NS.2
8.EE.1
8.EE.2
238
Chapter 2 Overview – Scientific Notation
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 11 days/ Oct.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students learn why scientists and
mathematicians express quantities in scientific notation and how to convert numbers
between scientific notation and standard form. Students will also learn to perform
operations on numbers in scientific notation and to use such numbers to solve realworld problems.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:



How can we compare and contrast
numbers?
How can counting, measuring, or
labeling help to make sense of the
world around us?
Key Words/Terminology:
 coefficient
 scientific notation
 standard form

A quantity can be represented in
various ways. Problem solving depends
on choosing wise ways.
Numeric fluency includes both the
understanding of and the ability to
appropriately use numbers.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.EE.1
8.EE.3
8.EE.4
239
Chapter 3 Overview – Algebraic Linear Equations
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 11 days/ Oct.-Nov.
Brief Description of Chapter: This chapter builds on students’ work in Course 2 (7th
grade). In that course, they solved one-variable equations that required many steps
including distributing positive numbers over parenthetical expressions, such as (X-3). In
this chapter, students will need to work carefully as they learn to distribute negative
numbers over these expressions, and then extend to linear relationships whose graphs
do not pass through the origin {this concept continues through chapter 4}.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:



What makes a computational strategy
both effective and efficient?
How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
Key Words/Terminology:
 consistent equation
 identity
 inconsistent equation



Computational fluency includes
understanding not only the meaning, but
also the appropriate use of numerical
operations.
The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
The message conveyed by the data
depends on how the data is collected,
represented, and summarized.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.EE.5
8.EE.7
8.EE.7a
8.EE.7b
240
Chapter 4 Overview – Lines and Linear Equations
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 15 days/ Nov.-Dec.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students explore linear relationships
between two quantities. They are introduced to the concept of slope and learn how to
identify the slopes of lines from both their graphs and their equations. Once students
are familiar with slope, students learn how to represent linear relationships in multiple
ways.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:




How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
What makes an algebraic algorithm
both effective and efficient?
Key Words/Terminology:
 linear relationship
 rise
 run
 slope
 slope-intercept form


Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one
another to produce a coherent whole.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.EE.5
8.EE.6
241
Chapter 5 Overview – Systems of Linear Equations
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 15 days/ Jan-Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students are introduced to systems of
linear equations and learn about inconsistent and dependent systems within linear
equations. Inconsistent and dependent systems of linear equations are also introduced.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:





How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
What makes an algebraic algorithm
both effective and efficient?
How can we use mathematical models
to describe physical relationships?
How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Key Words/Terminology:
 common term
 elimination method
 dependent system of equations
 graphical method
 inconsistent system of equations
 point of intersection



Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
Algebraic and numeric procedures are
interconnected and build on one
another to produce a coherent whole.
Mathematical models can be used to
describe and quantify physical
relationships.
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.EE.8
8.EE.8a
8.EE.8b
8.EE.8c
242
Chapter 6 Overview – Functions
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 16 days/ Feb.
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students are introduced to relations and
learn to identify functions. They learn to represent a function in different forms. Students
learn to identify linear and nonlinear functions from graphs. They describe and sketch
functions to show their qualitative features. They compare linear functions represented
in the same form and in different forms.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:



How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How are patterns of change related to
the behavior of functions?
Key Words/Terminology:
 function
 input
 linear function
 many-to-many
 many-to-one
 mapping diagram
 nonlinear function
 one-to-many

The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Patterns and relationships can be
represented graphically, numerically,
symbolically, or verbally.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.F.1
8.F.2
8.F.3
8.F.4
8.F.5
243
Chapter 7 Overview – Pythagorean Theorem
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 10 days/ March
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students learn the Pythagorean
Theorem, its converse, and its applications. They will apply the Pythagorean Theorem
in mathematical and real-world problems in both two and three-dimensions.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:




How do geometric relationships help
us solve problems and/or make sense
of phenomena?
How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
How can be measurements be used to
solve problems?



Key Words/Terminology:
 hypotenuse
 leg
 Pythagorean Theorem
Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
Coordinate geometry can be used to
represent and verify geometric/algebraic
relationships.
Everyday objects have a variety of
attributes, each of which can be
measured in many ways.
Measurements can be used to describe,
compare, and make sense of
phenomena.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.EE.2
8.G.6
8.G.7
8.G.8
8.G.9
244
Chapter 8 Overview – Geometric Transformations
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 16 days/ March/April
Brief Description of Chapter: This chapter introduces the distance-preserving
transformation (translations, reflections, and rotations-and dilations). The students will
learn to draw these transformations on coordinate planes, represent them using
algebraic function notations, and use them in problem-solving.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:




What situations can be analyzed using
transformations and symmetries?
How can spatial relationships be
described by careful use of geometric
language?
How do geometric relationships help
us solve problems and/or make sense
of phenomena?
Key Words/Terminology:
 angle of rotation
 center of dilation
 center of rotation
 clockwise
 counterclockwise
 dilation
 half turn
 image


Shape and area can be conserved
during mathematical transformations.
Geometric properties can be used to
construct geometric figures.
Geometric relationships provide a
means to make sense of a variety of
phenomena.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.G.1
8.G.1a
8.G.1b
8.G.1c
8.G.3
245
Chapter 9 Overview – Congruence and Similarity
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 12 days/ May
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students learn to describe congruent
figures more precisely. Students have learned that similar figures have “the same shape
but not necessarily the same size.” This intuitive definition can be misleading, because
some students may think that all rectangles are similar, since they all have a rectangular
shape. Congruent figures are a subset of similar figures, since congruent figures are
similar with a constant of proportionality of 1.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:



What situations can be analyzed using
transformations and symmetries?
How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
How can we use physical models to
clarify mathematical relationships?
Key Words/Terminology:
 congruence
 corresponding angles
 corresponding sides
 statement of congruence



Shape and area can be conserved
during mathematical transformations.
How can we best represent and verify
geometric/algebraic relationships?
Physical models can be used to clarify
mathematical relationships.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.G.2
8.G.4
8.G.5
246
Chapter 10 Overview – Statistics
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 14 days/ May-June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students explore bivariate data. Given
two sets of quantitative data. Given two sets of quantitative data, they learn to construct
a scatter plot showing the corresponding data points on a coordinate plane. This allows
them to analyze patterns of association between the data sets, patterns of association
between the data sets, and identify any outliers. They will also learn to read, construct
and interpret two-way tables of categorical data.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:



How can change be best represented
mathematically?
How can patterns, relations, and
functions be used as tools to best
describe and help explain real-life
situations?
How can the collection, organization,
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
Key Words/Terminology:
 association
 bivariate data
 categorical data
 clustering
 extrapolate
 interpolate




The symbolic language of algebra is
used to communicate and generalize
patterns in mathematics.
Algebraic representation can be used to
generalize patterns and relationships.
The message conveyed by the data
depends on how the data is collected,
represented, and summarized.
The results of statistical investigation
can be used to support or refute an
argument.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
8.SP.1
8.SP.2
8.SP.3
8.SP.4
247
Chapter 11 Overview – Probability
Grade: 8
Amount of Time: 16 days June
Brief Description of Chapter: In this chapter, students build on work from Course 2
(7th Grade) as they learn to compute probabilities of compound as they learn to
compute probabilities of compound events, both independent and dependent events.
Not only will they learn to identify whether compound events are independent or
dependent, they will also learn how to apply the multiplication and addition rules for
probability to them.
Essential Questions:
Enduring Understandings:


How can experimental and theoretical 
probabilities be used to make
predictions or draw conclusions?
How can the collection, organization, 
interpretation, and display of data be
used to answer questions?
Key Words/Terminology:
 Addition Rule of Probability
 compound event
 dependent events
 independent events
 Multiplication Rule of Probability
Experimental results tend to approach
theoretical probabilities after a large
number of trials.
The message conveyed by the data
depends on how the data is collected,
represented, and summarized.
Math Proficiencies Addressed:
7.SP.5
7.SP.6
7.SP.8
7.SP.8a
7.SP.8b
7.SP.8c
248
APPENDICES
Appendix A: Technology Integration
Appendix B: 21st Century Life and Career Skills
Appendix C: Literature Connections
Appendix D: Flexible Grouping
Appendix E: Articles
249
Appendix A: Technology Integration
Technology is an essential tool for learning mathematics in the 21st century, and all
schools must ensure that all their students have access to technology. Effective
teachers maximize the potential of technology to develop students’ understanding,
stimulate their interest, and increase their proficiency in mathematics. When
technology is used strategically, it can provide access to mathematics for all
students.
-A Position of the National Council of Teachers of Mathematics on Technology
(March 2008)
The use of technology and tools in the mathematics classroom allows students to move
from skills in isolation to exploration and discovery. Research suggests that the
strategic use of technology and mathematical tools not only makes mathematics more
engaging and fun, but also facilitates the students’ ability to engage in real life
applications of mathematics and prepares students for the demands of this century.
Mathematically proficient students are able to make sound decisions about when to use
technological tools, as well as identify relevant external mathematical resources, such
as digital content located on a website, and use them to pose or solve problems and to
explore and deepen their understanding of concepts.
The following list of technology resources is not meant to be an exhaustive compilation,
but rather a sampling of the vast array of materials that should be used strategically and
selected purposefully to enhance classroom instruction. It is important to consider the
dynamic nature of technology, as well as the unique needs of each learner/class before
selecting a supplemental resource.
Math in Focus Technology Resources
Online Student Book eBook (Grades K-8) - Provides online access to the Student
Book pages. Students receive their own account and can log on to view their book
materials from any computer with an internet connection.
Online Teacher’s Edition eBook - Provides online access to the Teacher’s edition.
Teachers each receive their own account and can log on to view the Teacher’s Edition
from any computer with an Internet connection. The online platform also features an
online lesson planner.
Exam View Assessment Suite/Exam View Test Generator - Teachers can create
unlimited online customized tests and practice materials for students including multiple
choice, short response, and extended response problems. Grades six through eight
(Courses 1-3) are available on a CD-ROM.
Online Assessment System (Grades 6-8) - Online test preparation with a learning
management system and reports. Teachers and students can access through
my.hrw.com.
250
Teacher One Stop CD-ROM (Grades 6-8) - Complete printable PDFs of available
Teacher Resources for ease of use and daily lesson planning.
Virtual Manipulatives - The online virtual manipulatives are ready to be used with the
interactive whiteboard or other projection technology. These digital tools provide
engaging activities to model concepts and enhance instruction.
Online Student Workbook eBook (Grades K-5) - Teachers can access all of the
Student Workbook pages in printable, digital format.
Online Teacher Resources - Printable blackline masters of: Problem of the Lesson,
Reteach, Extra Practice, Enrichment, Assessments, School-to-Home Connections,
Additional Resources
Math Background Videos - Singapore math pedagogy video podcast and parent
support videos for teachers and parents. Teachers can access math background videos
and podcasts to ensure they have a solid understanding of the math behind the Math in
Focus lessons. Parents can learn more about Singapore math and how to help their
children succeed.
Interactive Whiteboard Lessons - Interactive whiteboard packages include the Learn,
Guided Practice, Let’s Explore and Problem of the Lesson portions of the lesson.
Online Student Interactivities - Interactive online tutorials, activities, and quizzes for
students in grades K-5. Aligned to Singapore math concepts, student interactivities
provide a great way to differentiate instruction. Students can access interactivities at
home for practice and in class at a math center.
Online Transition Resource Map - Designed to be used in conjunction with the
Teacher’s Guide to Transition, this online resource makes it easier to locate and print
previous grade level Reteach and Extra Practice content to address transition related
knowledge and skill gaps.
Singapore Math Bar Models for iPad - This app uses signature Singapore math bar
modeling method for problem solving to visually represent word problems in a fun and
interactive way.
Think Central - www.thinkcentral.com Math in Focus website for the elementary
grades, K-5.
Holt McDougal Online - my.hrw.com Math in Focus website for the middle grades, 68.
251
General Math Sites:
 A Maths Dictionary for Kids - http://www.amathsdictionaryforkids.com/ - A math
dictionary defining common math terms and concepts. Includes practice with
activities and animations.
 A+ Math - http://www.aplusmath.com/ - Helps students improve their math skills
interactively.
 AAA Math - http://aaamath.com/index.html - Hundreds of online interactive
arithmetic lessons, problems, and games for grades K-8.
 All Elementary Mathematics - http://www.bymath.com/ - An online mathematical
high school. Arithmetic, algebra, geometry, trigonometry, functions and graphs,
analysis. Theory and solving problems. Versions of examination tests.
 Biz Kids - http://bizkids.com/ - Financial Literacy- Kids teach kids about money
and business.
 BrainPOP JR - http://www.brainpopjr.com/math/ - Videos, games, activities, skill
practice. Students and teachers will have 24-hour access beginning 2013-14.
 BrainPOP Math - http://www.brainpop.com/math/ - Animated characters delve
into the worlds of numbers and operations, measurements, geometry, algebra,
and data analysis.
 Calculation Nation - http://calculationnation.nctm.org/
 Common Formulas http://www.iofm.net/community/kidscorner/maths/common_formulas.htm - Has
information about common formulas in mathematics, such as circumference,
area and volume.
 Convertalot - http://convertalot.org/ - A collection of free Java-based
measurements converters, calculators, unit translators, and games. Financial
Literacy
 ConvertIt.com - http://www.convertit.com/Go/ConvertIt/ - Includes tools such as a
measurement conversion calculator, various calculators, time zone clocks, and
exchange rate converters.
 Coolmath4kids - http://www.coolmath4kids.com/ - Math games, problems,
calculators, puzzles, and fun and for all levels.
 Count On - http://www.counton.org/ - Many elementary Math games supported
by the University of York
 Exemplars - http://www.exemplars.com/ - Standards-based Instruction and
assessment
 Fact Monster Math - http://www.factmonster.com/mathmoney.html - Learn about
numbers, measurement, money, tables and formulas. Includes conversion
calculator, games and quizzes. Financial Literacy
 Figure This! Math Challenges for Families - http://www.figurethis.org/index.html Assortment of mathematical challenges based on real life situations. Includes
hints, answers, and explanations.
 Fraction Addition and Subtraction - http://www.lessontutor.com/sv1.html - Helps
students work through the six most common stumbling blocks to working with
252


















fractions. Also explains how to find the least common denominator, how to
identify equivalent fractions, and how to reduce and rename fractions.
Fraction Tutorial - http://www.kidsolr.com/math/fractions.html - Practice with
equivalence, reducing, improper and mixed, multiplication, division, addition, and
subtraction of fractions. Flash required.
Free Math Games For Kids - http://www.scweb4free.com/ - Has online math
games for elementary and middle school kids.
Free Mathematics How-to Library http://www.teacherschoice.com.au/mathematics_how-to_library.htm - Offers help
with algebra, geometry, calculus, fractions, functions, gradient, money and
trigonometry problems. Includes worked examples and download files.
FunBrain - http://www.funbrain.com/ - Educational games for kids of all ages
Illuminations - http://illuminations.nctm.org/ - This page contains activities and
resources that are appropriate for all levels of students.
International Education Software - http://www.ies.co.jp/math/java/ - The material
presented in the following pages are for middle school students, high school
students, college students, and all who are interested in mathematics. You will
find interactive programs that you can manipulate and a lot of animation that
helps you to grasp the meaning of mathematical ideas. (middle)
Kaboose - http://funschool.kaboose.com/ - Elementary games
KhanAcademy - http://www.khanacademy.org/ - Great resources for reteaching
concepts, includes videos.
Kids Maths - http://www.kidsmath.com/ - Contains several different games to
learn mathematics. (All)
Math by OZ - http://www.numberpower.org/ - Teacher-created program uses
QuickTime movies to solve problems involving whole numbers, decimals,
fractions, percents, measurements, geometry and equations. Includes word
problem hints and contact information. (all)
Math Cats - http://www.mathcats.com/index.html#contents - Games, crafts, art,
and story problems featuring cats, to inspire children and teens to enjoy and
explore mathematical concepts. (all)
Math Forum at Drexel - http://mathforum.org
Math Goodies - http://www.mathgoodies.com/ - Features interactive math
lessons, homework help, worksheets, puzzles, message boards, and
newsletters.
Math in Daily Life - http://www.learner.org/interactives/dailymath/ - Virtual exhibit
looks at the ways people use math every day, from cooking to planning for
retirement. Financial Literacy
Math In Focus - http://www.hmheducation.com/singaporemath/index.php
Math Toys - http://www.nummolt.com/obbl/index.html - Online math toys. Live
simulations to play with reality, elementary and middle school
MathTV - http://www.mathtv.com/videos_by_topic - Math videos
Math Worksheets - http://www.teach-nology.com/worksheets/math/ - Features
printable worksheets for students to practice with middle school concepts.
253
















Math.com - http://www.math.com/ - Offers free math lessons and homework help,
with an emphasis on geometry, algebra, statistics, and calculus. Middle
Math2.org - http://math2.org/ - Reference Tables for Math topics
Mathematics History - http://library.thinkquest.org/22584/ - Traces the
development of math throughout the ages. Also includes biographies of famous
mathematicians.
Mathematics Magazine for Grades 1-12 - http://www.mathematicsmagazine.com/
- Monthly publication offering math help, list of competitions, and links.
Math-Kitecture - http://www.math-kitecture.com/ - Be a master architect. Draft a
floor plan using software as you learn math, or try other fun "activities." Designed
for middle school students.
Math Is Fun - http://www.mathsisfun.com/ - Includes games, puzzles, and offline
activities.
Mathsforkids - http://www.mathsforkids.com/ - This site has been created to have
fun and to practice math. Includes addition, subtraction, multiplication, geometry
(all grades)
Mega-Mathematics - http://www.c3.lanl.gov/mega-math/index.html - Resources
for students collected at Los Alamos National Lab. middle
Middle School Math http://www.awesomelibrary.org/Classroom/Mathematics/MiddleHigh_School_Math/Middle-High_School_Math.html - Large resource for students
of middle schools. Includes algebra, calculus, graphing, and data analysis by
subject and standard.
Mike's Math Club - http://www.mff.org/mmc/ - Includes puzzles and games to test
knowledge of basic skills.
National Council of Teacher of Mathmetics - http://www.nctm.org/ - NCTM is a
public voice of mathematics education, providing vision, leadership, and
professional development to support teachers in ensuring mathematics learning
of the highest quality for all students.
Online Math Applications - http://library.thinkquest.org/4116/ - Explains the role of
math in investing, music, history, science, and travel. Includes stock simulation
game. Financial Literacy
Practical Money Skills - http://www.practicalmoneyskills.com/ - Financial Literacy
Primary Games - http://www.primarygames.co.uk/ - A collection of interactive
math games with supporting worksheets.
S.O.S. Math - http://www.sosmath.com/ - Contains tutorials covering algebra,
trigonometry, calculus, differential equations, matrices, and complex variables.
Reviews the most important results, techniques and formulas. Presented in
worksheet format and require active participation. Includes practice quizzes and
forum board. middle
Shodor Education Foundation - http://www.shodor.org/interactivate/activities/ These activities listed below are designed for either group or individual
exploration into concepts from middle school mathematics. The activities are
Java applets and as such require a java-capable browser.
254










Tables and Graphs - http://www.mcwdn.org/Graphs/TabGraphMain.html - Has
information, graphics and quizzes to help students review tables and graphs
concepts. 4th-6th
Teach R Kids Math - http://www.teachrkids.com/ - Large collection of online
activities and interactive worksheets allow kids to practice basic math skills. elem
Teaching Time - http://www.teachingtime.co.uk/index.html - Interactive clock,
online games, and printable worksheets help kids learn to tell time.
The Abacus: The Art of Calculating with Beads http://www.ee.ryerson.ca:8080/%7Eelf/abacus/ - Introduces the abacus, relates
its history, and shows how to perform basic mathematical operations on it. Also
answers questions about the ancient tool and shows how to build one with
Legos. 4-6
The Mathsfile Game Show http://www.bbc.co.uk/education/mathsfile/index.shtml - Hosted by the ancient
mathematicians, Hypatia and Pythagoras, 11-14 years old students can have fun
working through a variety of games and print offs.
Thinking Blocks - www.thinkingblocks.com - Great website for practicing bar
modeling with hundreds or problems as well as the ability to make your own
problem
Toon University Math Games - http://www.toonuniversity.com/free/math-games1st-3rd.asp - Math games for counting, subtraction, multiplication, place value,
and comparing number values. 1st-3rd
United Streaming - http://streaming.discoveryeducation.com/ - Videos for math
What Good is Math? - http://weusemath.org/ - Explains how kids can use math
skills in real life.
YouTube - http://www.youtube.com/ - Search for many videos online.
255
Math Games
The Common Core Mathematics Standards place an increased emphasis on
developing basic skills. The following list of math games, organized by content and
grade clusters, encourage collaboration and increase student motivation all while
practicing developmentally appropriate math skills. Many of the games can also be
differentiated based on the learner’s profile (e.g. level, time limit, speed, etc.).
Primary Grades
Counting, Sequencing Numbers, and Patterns:
 Count Us In - http://www.abc.net.au/countusin/games/game1.htm - Count sheep into
two pens. This site also links to other primary games.
 Counting - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/spookyseq/spookyseq1.html Fill in the number missing in the sequence using spooky ghosts.
 Dog Bone - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/DogBone/gamebone.html Find hidden bones on the 1-100 number grid in a minute.
 Fishy Fun - http://www.primarygames.com/math/fishycount/ - Count fish.
 Mend the Number Square http://www.bbc.co.uk/schools/numbertime/games/mend.shtml - Fill in missing
numbers as directed on 1-100 number grid. This site also links to other primary
games.
Geometry and Measurement:
 Coin Addition - http://toonuniversity.com/flash.asp?err=569&engine= - Reinforces
counting money and addition
 Fishy Fractions and Picture Match http://www.iknowthat.com/com/App?File=FractionGame.htm&Type=S&App=Fraction
Game&Topic=fractionpiematch
 Oddball - http://www.funbrain.com/cgi-bin/ob.cgi?A1=s&A2=2 - Compare shapes
and click on the one that is different
 Stop the Clock (hour) - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/StopTheClock/sthecR.html
 Stop the Clock - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/StopTheClock/sthec1.html
- Tell time to the hour and half-hour.
 Stop the Clock - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/StopTheClock/sthec4.html
- Tell time to the minute
Addition Practice Games:
 Bug Shoes * http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/earlymath/bugabalooShoes.htm Students have visual aides to complete basic addition facts.
 Fitness Math * - http://www.fun4thebrain.com/addition/addfitness.html
 Ghostblasters * - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/Ghostblasters2/gb2nores.html
 Jet Ski Addition - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/games/jetski/jetski.html
256








Math Lines - http://www.primarygames.com/math/mathlines/ - Students make sums
of 10. This site also links to other primary games.
Number Balls http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballs/numberballsAS2.htm
Number Twins http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballs/numberballsAS2.htm Addition Facts to 10; This game also requires student to think about constraints.
Penguin Math * http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/popup/popup_addition.htm
Pop Math http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballoons/NumberBalloons_ad
d_level1.htm - Addition facts to 10
Power Lines - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/Powerlines/powerlines1.html
- This game also requires student to think about constraints.
Skill Builders Games - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/
Sum Sense * - http://resources.oswego.org/games/SumSense/sumadd.html
Subtraction Practice Games:
 Number Balls http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballs/numberballsAS2.htm
 Skill Builders Games - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/
 Subtraction Harvest *http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/earlymath/subHarvest.htm - Students
have visual aides to complete basic subtraction facts.
Multiplication Practice Games:
 Ants Go Marching* - http://www.multiplication.com/games/play/marching-ants
 Granny Prix* - http://www.multiplication.com/games/play/granny-prix - Customize
your “granny” and her wheelchair. Learn the facts you need to work on at the end of
the game.
 Math Man Multiplication http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/mathman/mathman_multiplication.ht
m - Old school Pac-Man with a math twist!
 MATHO - http://www.aplusmath.com/games/matho/MultMatho.html - When you
“win,” you can submit your score and the state you live in to the website!
 Multiplication Arrays* - http://illuminations.nctm.org/ActivityDetail.aspx?ID=64
 Multiplication.com - http://www.multiplication.com/
 Product Game - http://illuminations.nctm.org/ActivityDetail.aspx?ID=29
 Puny Pet Shop* - http://www.multiplication.com/games/play/punys-pet-shop Students are owners of a pet shop and earn an animal for each correct answer.
 Quick Math - http://themathgames.com/arithmetic-games/addition-subtractionmultiplication-division/quick-math-game.php - Identify the operation to complete the
equation and challenge your friends (or teacher) with an e-mail
 Skill Builders Games - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/
257


Sum Sense Multiplication* http://resources.oswego.org/games/SumSense/summulti.html
Xfactor Shooter* - http://www.coolmath-games.com/0-math-lines-xfactor/index.html
Grades 4-5
Number Sense:
 Number Balls http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballs/numberballsAS2.htm Uses positive and negative integers
 Comparing Fractions- Dolphin Racing* - http://www.bbc.co.uk/skillswise/maths
 Fraction Pop* http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/fractions/Balloons_fractions3.htm
 Place Value Pirates - http://mrnussbaum.com/placevaluepirates/
 Sum Sense Multiplication* http://resources.oswego.org/games/SumSense/summulti.html
 Skill Builders Games - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/
 Billy Bug 2 (coordinates) - http://resources.oswego.org/games/BillyBug2/bug2.html
 BBC Math Activities - http://www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/ks2/maths/
Geometry:
 Banana Hunt - http://resources.oswego.org/games/bananahunt/bhunt.html
 BBC Math Activities - http://www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/ks2/maths/
 Billy Bug 2 (coordinates) - http://resources.oswego.org/games/BillyBug2/bug2.html
 Follow a Path (coordinate plane) http://www.harcourtschool.com/activity/follow_a_path/
 Shape Game - http://www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/ks2/maths/shape_space/shapes/play/
 What's the Point? (coordinate plane) http://www.bbc.co.uk/bitesize/ks2/maths/shape_space/grids/play/
Grades 6-8
Number Sense:
 Asteroids (Exponents) http://www.mathdork.com/games/asteroidsexp3/asteroidsexp3.html
 Battleship (Distributive Property)* - http://www.quia.com/ba/15357.html
 Factor Game - http://illuminations.nctm.org/activitydetail.aspx?id=12
 Make 24* http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/make24_level_one/make24AS2_leve
l1.htm
 Mixed Practice by Grade Level - http://www.ixl.com/
 Number Balls http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/numberballs/numberballsAS2.htm
 Skill Builders* - http://www.arcademicskillbuilders.com/
258

Sum Sense Multiplication* http://resources.oswego.org/games/SumSense/summulti.html
Fractions & Decimals:
 Balloon Pop Fractions* http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/fractions/Balloons_fractions3.htm
 Clara Fraction's Ice Cream Shop (Mixed Numbers) http://mrnussbaum.com/icecream/
 Matching Fractions* http://www.sheppardsoftware.com/mathgames/fractions/memory_fractions4.htm
 Place Value Pirates - http://mrnussbaum.com/placevaluepirates/
 Thirteen Ways of Looking for 1/2 - http://pbskids.org/cyberchase/mathgames/thirteen-ways-looking-half/
Integers:
 Billy Bug 2 - http://resources.oswego.org/games/BillyBug2/bug2.html
 Number Balls - http://themathgames.com/our-games/arithmetic-games/orderpositive-negative-integers/
 Tic Tac Go* http://www.fisme.science.uu.nl/toepassingen/03088/toepassing_wisweb.en.html
Functions:
 Stop That Creature - http://pbskids.org/cyberchase/math-games/stop-creature/
 Function Machine http://teams.lacoe.edu/documentation/classrooms/amy/algebra/56/activities/functionmachine/functionmachine5_6.html
Geometry:
Alien Angles - http://www.mathplayground.com/alienangles.html
Banana Hunt - http://resources.oswego.org/games/bananahunt/bhunt.html
Billy Bug (Coordinates) - http://www.oswego.org/ocsd-web/games/BillyBug2/bug2.html
Catch the Fly (coordinates) http://hotmath.com/hotmath_help/games/ctf/ctf_hotmath.swf
Design a Party (Area & Perimeter) http://www.mathplayground.com/PartyDesigner/PartyDesigner.html
Shape Surveyor* - http://www.funbrain.com/poly/index.html
Stock the Shelves (coordinates) - http://mrnussbaum.com/stockshelves/
Computation Practice (Fluency)
Addition:
 A+ Math - http://www.aplusmath.com/Flashcards/addition.html
 Add Like Mad - http://ramogames.com/games/Add-Like-Mad.htm
 Around the World in 80 Seconds * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/roundtheworld_eng_launcher.html
259




Dude's Dilemma * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/dilemma_eng_launcher.html
Pole Climber
Speed Grid Challenge: Addition (advanced) * - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/SpeedGrid/Addition/urikares.html
That's a Fact * http://www.harcourtschool.com/activity/thats_a_fact/english_K_3.html
Subtraction:
 A+ Math - http://www.aplusmath.com/Flashcards/subtraction.html
 Around the World in 80 Seconds * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/roundtheworld_eng_launcher.html
 Dude's Dilemma * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/dilemma_eng_launcher.html
 That's a Fact * http://www.harcourtschool.com/activity/thats_a_fact/english_K_3.html
Multiplication:
 Around the World in 80 Seconds * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/roundtheworld_eng_launcher.html
 Dude's Dilemma * http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/dilemma_eng_launcher.html
 Math Magician: Multiplication* - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/Mathmagician/mathsmulti.html
 Sum Sense Multiplication* - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/SumSense/summulti.html
 That's a Fact*
Division:
 Around the World in 80 Seconds* http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/roundtheworld_eng_launcher.html
 Division Bingo* http://www.bgfl.org/bgfl/custom/resources_ftp/client_ftp/ks2/maths/bingo/index.html
 Division Machine* http://www.amblesideprimary.com/ambleweb/mentalmaths/dividermachine.html
 Dude's Dilemma* http://www.missmaggie.org/scholastic/dilemma_eng_launcher.html
 Math Magician: Division* - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/Mathmagician/mathsdiv.html
 Sum Sense Division* - http://www.oswego.org/ocsdweb/games/SumSense/sumdiv.html
 That's a Fact* http://www.harcourtschool.com/activity/thats_a_fact/english_K_3.html
260
Appendix B: 21st Century Life and Career Skills
In today's global economy, students need to be lifelong learners who have the knowledge and skills
to adapt to an evolving workplace and world. To address these demands, Standard 9, 21st Century
Life and Careers, establishes clear guidelines for what students need to know and be able to do in
order to be successful in their future careers and to achieve financial independence.
In Evesham, 21st century life and career skills focus on enabling student to make informed decisions
that will prepare them to engage as active citizens in a dynamic global society and to successfully
meet the challenges and opportunities of the 21st century global workplace. Therefore, these life and
career skills are integrated across the K-8 curriculum in various subject areas, where appropriate. It
is our goal to build a solid foundation for the high school that foster a population that:

Continually self-reflects and seeks to improve the essential life and career practices that lead
to success.

Uses effective communication and collaboration skills and resources to interact with a global
society.

Is financially literate and financially responsible at home and in the broader community.

Is knowledgeable about careers and can plan, execute, and alter career goals in response to
changing societal and economic conditions.

Seeks to attain skill and content mastery to achieve success in a chosen career path.
The following chart further elaborates on Standard 9 and identifies areas across the curriculum
where these concepts and skills are integrated into instruction.

Career Ready Practices
These practices outline the skills that all individuals need to have to truly be adaptable,
reflective, and proactive in life and careers. These are researched practices that are
essential to career readiness.

9.1 Personal Financial Literacy
This standard outlines the important fiscal knowledge, habits, and skills that must be
mastered in order for students to make informed decisions about personal finance. Financial
literacy is an integral component of a student's college and career readiness, enabling
students to achieve fulfilling, financially-secure, and successful careers.

9.2 Career Awareness, Exploration, and Preparation
This standard outlines the importance of being knowledgeable about one's interests and
talents, and being well informed about postsecondary and career options, career planning,
and career requirements.
261
2014 New Jersey Core Curriculum Content Standards – 21st-Century Life and Careers
*CPIs to reach by grade 4
Standard 9.1 Personal Financial Literacy: All students will develop skills and strategies that promote personal and
financial responsibility related to financial planning, savings, investment, and charitable giving in the global
economy.
Strand
Content Statement
Educational achievement, career
choice, and entrepreneurial skills
all play a role in achieving a
desired lifestyle.
Income often comes from different
sources, including alternative
sources.
Income affects spending decisions
and lifestyle.
Strand
Content Statement
Money management involves
setting financial goals.
Money management is reliant on
developing and maintaining
personal budgets.
Money management requires
understanding of cash flow systems
and business practices.
A. Income and Careers
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.4.A.1 Explain the difference between a
3rd Grade Communities Unit
career and a job, and identify various
jobs in the community and the related Computer Curriculum- Careers
earnings.
Project (Grade 4)
9.1.4.A.2 Identify potential sources of income.
Computer Curriculum- Careers
Project (Grade 4)
9.1.4.A.3 Explain how income affects spending
and take‐home pay.
4th Grade Zoom
B. Money Management
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.4.B.1 Differentiate between financial wants 3rd Grade Communities Unit
and needs.
9.1.4.B.2 Identify age-appropriate financial
Math Curriculum
goals.
9.1.4.B.3 Explain what a budget is and why it is 4th Grade Zoom
important.
9.1.4.B.4 Identify common household expense
categories and sources of income.
9.1.4.B.5 Identify ways to earn and save.
262
4th Grade Zoom, 4th Grade Financial
Literacy Unit (Math)
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
Strand
Content Statement
Credit management includes
making informed choices about
sources of credit and requires an
understanding of the cost of credit.
Credit worthiness is dependent on
making informed credit decisions
and managing debt responsibly.
Strand
Content Statement
Information about investment
options assists with financial
planning.
C. Credit and Debt Management
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.4.C.1 Explain why people borrow money and 4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
the relationship between credit and
(Math)
debt.
9.1.4.C.2 Identify common sources of credit
(e.g., banks, credit card companies)
and types of credit (e.g., loans, credit
cards, mortgages).
9.1.4.C.3 Compare and contrast credit cards
and debit cards and the advantages
and disadvantages of using each.
9.1.4.C.4 Determine the relationships among
income, expenses, and interest.
9.1.4.C.5 Determine personal responsibility
related to borrowing and lending.
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math); 4th Grade Zoom
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
9.1.4.C.6 Summarize ways to avoid credit
problems.
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
D. Planning, Saving, and Investing
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
9.1.4.D.1 Determine various ways to save.
9.1.4.D.2 Explain what it means to “invest.”
9.1.4.D.3 Distinguish between saving and
investing.
263
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
Resources
4th Grade Financial Literacy Unit
(Math)
SMG
SMG
Strand
Content Statement
The ability to prioritize wants and
needs assists in making informed
investments, purchases, and
decisions.
E. Becoming a Critical Consumer
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
9.1.4.E.1 Determine factors that influence
consumer decisions related to
money.
9.1.4.E.2
Strand
Content Statement
The potential for building and
using personal wealth includes
responsibility to the broader
community and an understanding
of the legal rights and
responsibilities of being a good
citizen.
Philanthropic, charitable, and
entrepreneurial organizations play
distinctly different but vitally
important roles in supporting the
interests of local and global
communities.
Strand
Content Statement
Apply comparison shopping skills to
purchasing decisions.
F. Civic Financial Responsibility
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
9.1.4.F.1 Demonstrate an understanding of
individual financial obligations and
community financial obligations.
9.1.4.F.2
Explain the roles of philanthropy,
volunteer service, and charitable
contributions, and analyze their
impact on community development
and quality of living.
G. Insuring and Protecting
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
9.1.4.G.1 Describe how valuable items might
be damaged or lost and ways to
protect them.
264
Resources
4th Grade Zoom
4th Grade Zoom
Math Curriculum
Computer Curriculum
Resources
3rd Grade Communities Unit
4th Grade United We Stand
3rd Grade Communities Unit
4th Grade Patchwork of Cultures
Resources
4th Grade Zoom
Math Literacy Connections
Standard
9.2 Career Awareness, Exploration, and Preparation: .
Strand
A. Career Awareness
Cumulative Progress Indicator
Content Statement
CPI#
Resources
(CPI)
Career awareness includes an
9.2.4.A.1 Identify reasons why people work,
Computer Curriculum- Careers
different
types
of
work,
and
how
work
Project (Grade 4)
understanding of the world of work
can help a person achieve personal
and the knowledge and skills
and professional goals.
needed for traditional and
nontraditional jobs and careers.
9.2.4.A.2 Identify various life roles and civic and Computer Curriculum- Careers
work-related activities in the school, Project (Grade 4)
home, and community.
9.2.4.A.3 Investigate both traditional and
Computer Curriculum- Careers
nontraditional careers and relate
Project (Grade 4)
information to personal likes and
dislikes.
9.2.4.A.4 Explain why knowledge and skills
Computer Curriculum- Careers
acquired in the elementary grades lay Project (Grade 4)
the foundation for future academic
and career success.
Strand
Content Statement
B. Career Exploration
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
Resources
Only applies above grade 4
Strand
Content Statement
C. Career Preparation
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
(CPI)
Only applies above grade 4
265
Resources
Standard
9.3 Career & Technical Education (CTE):
Strand
Content Statement
CPI#
Cumulative Progress Indicator
(CPI)
Only applies above grade 8
266
Resources
2014 New Jersey Core Curriculum Content Standards – 21st-Century Life and Careers
Standard
9.1 21st-Personal Financial Literacy: All students will develop skills and strategies that promote personal
and financial responsibility related to financial planning, savings, investment, and charitable giving in the global
economy.
Strand
Content Statement
A. Income and Careers
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
5678
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.A.1 Explain the meaning and purposes X X
Math curriculum
of taxes and tax deductions and
why fees for various benefits (e.g.,
medical benefits) are taken out of
pay.
9.1.8.A.2 Relate how career choices,
X X X 6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
education choices, skills,
Authority
entrepreneurship, and economic
7th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Tolerance
conditions affect income.
FACS- Company, Interior Design,
Culinary Creations
ADT- Company, Manufacturing,
Factory
9.1.8.A.3 Differentiate among ways that
workers can improve earning
power through the acquisition of
new knowledge and skills.
9.1.8.A.4 Relate earning power to quality of
life across cultures.
X
9.1.8.A.5 Relate how the demand for certain
skills determines an individual’s
earning power.
X
267
X
Computers- multimedia project
6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Authority
Computer Curriculum
6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Change
6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Authority
6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Change
6th Soc. St. Grade A Study of
Authority
9.1.8.A.6 Explain how income affects
spending decisions.
X X X 6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Authority
FACS- Company, Fashion,
Culinary, Design on a Dime
9.1.8.A.7 Explain the purpose of the payroll
deduction process, taxable income,
and employee benefits.
Strand
Content Statement
XX
ADT- Company, Factory
FACS- Company
ADT- Company
B. Money Management
CPI#
Cumulative Progress Indicator 5 6 7 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.B.1 Distinguish among cash, check,
X X X FACS- Company, Design on a
credit card, and debit card.
Dime
9.1.8.B.2 Construct a simple personal
savings and spending plan based
on various sources of income.
9.1.8.B.3 Justify the concept of “paying
yourself first” as a financial savings
strategy.
9.1.8.B.4 Relate the concept of deferred
gratification to [investment,]
meeting financial goals, and
building wealth.
9.1.8.B.5 Explain the effect of the economy
on personal income, individual and
family security, and consumer
decisions.
268
ADT- Company
Math Curriculum
X X FACS- Company, Design on a
Dime
ADT- Company
Math Curriculum
X
Math (Grade 6)- Biz Kids- #304Where’s My Allowance
PMS- Lesson 12- Saving &
Investing
Math Curriculum
X X FACS- Company
Algebra I- performance task
X X FACS Curriculm- Company, Design
on a Dime
ADT- Design, Company, Factory,
Manufacturing
9.1.8.B.6 Evaluate the relationship of
cultural traditions and historical
influences on financial practice.
9.1.8.B.7 Construct a budget to save for
long-term, short-term, and
charitable goals.
9.1.8.B.8 Develop a system for keeping and
using financial records.
9.1.8.B.9 Determine the most appropriate
use of various financial products
and services (e.g., ATM, debit
cards, credit cards, check books).
9.1.8.B.10 Justify safeguarding personal
information when using credit
cards, banking electronically, or
filing forms.
9.1.8.B.11 Evaluate the appropriate financial
institutions to assist with meeting
various personal financial needs
and goals.
Strand
Content Statement
X X X 6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Change
6th Grade Soc. St. A Study of
Authority
7th Grade 5 Themes of
Geography/7 Elements of Culture
8th Grade A History of U.S.
X X FACS- Company & Design
electives
X X FACS- Company & Design
electives
X
Math Curriculum- Credits/Debits
FACS- Check with local banks,
use of debit cards for company
X X X X Computer Curriculum- Internet
safety
X
FACS- Check with local banks, use
of debit cards for company?
FACS- Company
C. Credit and Debt Management
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.C.1 Compare and contrast credit cards
X Math (Grade 7): Biz Kids: #402and debit cards and the
The Good, the Bad, the Ugly
advantages and disadvantages of
PMS Banking Services
using each.
9.1.8.C.2 Compare and contrast the financial
X
Math (Grade 6): Biz Kids: #204269
products and services offered by
different types of financial
institutions.
9.1.8.C.3 Compare and contrast debt and
credit management strategies.
9.1.8.C.4 Demonstrate an understanding of
the terminology associated with
different types of credit (e.g.,
credit cards, installment loans,
mortgages) and compare the
interest rates associated with each.
9.1.8.C.5 Calculate the cost of borrowing
various amounts of money using
different types of credit (e.g.,
credit cards, installment loans,
mortgages).
9.1.8.C.6 Determine ways to leverage debt
beneficially.
9.1.8.C.7 Determine potential consequences
of using “easy access” credit (e.g.,
using a line of credit vs. obtaining
a loan for a specific purpose).
9.1.8.C.8 Explain the purpose of a credit
score and credit record, and
summarize borrowers’ credit report
rights.
9.1.8.C.9 Summarize the causes and
consequences of personal
bankruptcy.
9.1.8.C.10 Determine when there is a need to
seek credit counseling and
appropriate times to utilize it.
Strand
Content Statement
Financial Institutions- All the
Same?
PMS Banking Services
X Math (Grade 7): Biz Kids: #402The Good, the Bad, the Ugly
PMS Banking Services
X Math (Grade 8): Biz Kids: #109
PMS Banking Services- Buying a
Home, Mortgages
BrainPop- Financial Literacy
X Math (Grade 8): Biz Kids: #115Using Credit
EconEdLink- Calculating Simple
Interest
PMS- Credit
X Math (Grade 8): Biz Kids: #123Income & Expenses
X Math (Grade 7): Biz Kids: #402Debt- Good, Bad, Ugly
X Math (Grade 8): PMS Lesson 7Credit
Biz Kids: #115- Using Your Credit
X Math (Grade 8): Biz Kids: #109,
X Math (Grade 8): Biz Kids: #213
Learning from Failure
D. Planning, Saving, and Investing
CPI#
Cumulative Progress Indicator 5 6 7 8
270
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.D.1 Determine how saving contributes
to financial well-being.
X
9.1.8.D.2 Differentiate among various
X
savings tools and how to use them
most effectively.
9.1.8.D.3 Differentiate among various
investment options.
X
9.1.8.D.4 Distinguish between income and
investment growth.
X
9.1.8.D.5 Explain the economic principle of
supply and demand.
X
Math (Grade 6)- BrainPop- Budget
Math Forum (Drexel Univ)- #1720
Susita
wolframalpha.com- Money &
Finance
X
Math (Grade 5)- Math in FocusChapter 10
Math (Grade 6): Biz Kids: #118Saving & Investing for Your Future
BrainPop- Budget Activity
X
X Grade 5- Math in Focus Chapter
10 (interest, investment funds)
Stock Market Game/Club
Math (Grade 6): Biz Kids: # 121Bulls, Bears and Financial Markets
Brain Pop- Stocks, Shares
WolframAlpha- Money & Finance
Algebra I Performance Task
X X X Math- (Grade 5)- Math in FocusChapter 10
Stock Market Game/Club
FACS- Company
X X X FACS- Company
ADT- Design, Company,
Manufacturing
Stock Market Game/Club
Strand
Content Statement
E. Becoming a Critical Consumer
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.E.1 Explain what it means to be a
X X X FACS
responsible consumer and the
ADT- Tools, Company
factors to consider when making
consumer decisions.
271
9.1.8.E.2 Identify personal information that
should not be disclosed to others
and the possible consequences of
doing or not doing so.
9.1.8.E.3 Compare and contrast product
facts versus advertising claims.
9.1.8.E.4 Prioritize personal wants and needs
when making purchases.
9.1.8.E.5 Analyze interest rates and fees
associated with financial services,
credit cards, debit cards, and gift
cards.
9.1.8.E.6 Compare the value of goods or
services from different sellers
when purchasing large quantities
and small quantities.
9.1.8.E.7 Evaluate how fraudulent activities
impact consumers, and justify the
creation of consumer protection
laws.
9.1.8.E.8 Recognize the techniques and
effects of deceptive advertising.
Strand
Content Statement
Computers- multimedia
presentation
X X X X Computer Curriculum
XX
FACS- Nutrition, Company
ADT- Company
X X X FACS
ADT- Tools, Company
XX
Computers- multimedia
presentation
FACS- Company
X X FACS & ADT
X
XX
ADT- Manufacturing, Company,
Factory
Math (Grade 7)- Math in Focus:
Chapter 3, Section 1
Biz Kids- #407- Scamaramma
PMS- Consumer Awareness
FACS- Nutrition, Company
ADT- Company
F. Civic Financial Responsibility
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.F.1 Explain how the economic system
X X FACS- Learning through Serving
of production and consumption
ADT
may be a means to achieve
272
significant societal goals.
9.1.8.F.2 Examine the implications of legal
and ethical behaviors when making
financial decisions.
9.1.8.F.3 Relate the impact of business,
government, and consumer fiscal
responsibility to the economy and
to personal finance.
Strand
Content Statement
X FACS- Learning through Serving
X FACS- Learning through Serving
G. Civic Financial Responsibility
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.1.8.G.1 Explain why it is important to
X FACS- Company
develop plans for protecting
current and future personal assets
against loss.
9.1.8.G.2 Determine criteria for deciding the
X FACS- Company
amount of insurance protection
needed.
9.1.8.G.3 Analyze the need for and value of
X FACS- Company
different types of insurance and
the impact of deductibles.
9.1.8.G.4 Evaluate the need for different
X Math (Grade 7)- Biz Kids: #207types of extended warranties.
The World is a Risky Place
273
Standard
9.2 Career Awareness, Exploration, and Preparation:
Strand
Content Statement
A. Career Awareness
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
(CPI)
Resources
n/a after grade 4
Strand
Content Statement
B. Career Exploration
Cumulative Progress Indicator
CPI#
567 8
Resources
(CPI)
9.2.8.B.1 Research careers within the 16
X X FACS & ADT
Career Clusters® and determine
attributes of career success.
9.2.8.B.2 Develop a Personalized Student
X X FACS
Learning Plan with the assistance
ADT- Manufacturing
of an adult mentor that includes
information about career areas of
interest, goals and an educational
plan.
9.2.8.B.3 Evaluate communication,
X 8th Grade Civics and Service Unit:
collaboration, and leadership skills
Leadership: Lead, Follow or Get
that can be developed through
Out of the Way!
school, home, work, and
FACS- Learning through Serving
extracurricular activities for use in
a career.
9.2.8.B.4 Evaluate how traditional and
X FACS
nontraditional careers have
ADT
evolved regionally, nationally, and
globally.
9.2.8.B.5 Analyze labor market trends using
X Computer Curriculum- multimedia
state and federal labor market
presentation “Life Plan Project”
information and other resources
available online.
274
9.2.8.B.6 Demonstrate understanding of the
necessary preparation and legal
requirements to enter the
workforce.
9.2.8.B.7 Evaluate the impact of online
activities and social media on
employer decisions.
X
FACS
Computer Curriculum- multimedia
presentation “Life Plan Project”
X X Guidance Curriculum
Computer Curriculum
Career Day
Standard
9.3 Career & Technical Education (CTE):
Strand
Content Statement
CPI#
Cumulative Progress Indicator
567 8
(CPI)
Only applies above grade 8
275
Resources
Appendix C: Literature Connections
Children learn best when subject matter is meaningful and useful. Literature
helps bring meaning to mathematics by highlighting situations where people use math
for real purposes. When selected strategically, children’s books provide opportunities for
students to think and reason mathematically, as well as to teach important math
concepts and skills. Literacy and mathematics require development of many of the
same processes including classifying, recognizing patterns, analyzing relationships,
organizing thoughts, solving problems, and justifying opinions and perspectives. Finding
and using natural mathematical connections in children’s literature provide opportunities
to develop and link the processes in these two content areas. Investigation of
mathematics through literature offers a natural way for students to connect the abstract
ideas, language, and symbols of mathematics to a context they understand (Felux, C.,
2013).
According to the National Council for Teachers of Mathematics (NCTM),
“learning mathematics is enhanced when content is placed in context and is connected
to other subject areas and when students are given multiple opportunities to apply
mathematics in meaningful ways as part of the learning process.” Comprehension is
the vehicle to conceptual understanding and successful learning of mathematics.
Students gain conceptual understanding through the use of strategies, which include
making connections, questioning, visualizing, inferring, predicting and synthesizing. To
this end, we embrace the integration of children’s literature into mathematics to enhance
instruction and facilitate communication.
The following list of literature resources are recommended to supplement
instruction and should be incorporated when time permits.
276
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Grade K Literature Collection
20 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Numbers to 5
Five Little Monkeys Jumping on the Bed
Numbers to 10
Mouse Count
Order by Size, Length or Width
The Best Bug Parade
Counting Numbers 0 to 10
Can You Count Ten Toes?
Size and Position
Big Dog, Little Dog
Numbers 0 to 20
City By Numbers
Solid and Flat Shapes
Circus Shapes
Numbers to 100
How Many Feet in the Bed
Comparing Sets
Ten Black Dots
Ordinal Numbers
The First Day of Winter
Calendar Patterns
Today is Monday
Counting On and Counting Back
Jack the Builder
Patterns
Pattern Fish
Number Facts
Quack and Count
Length and Height
How Big Were the Dinosaurs
Classifying and Sorting
The Button Box
Addition Stories
Rooster's Off to See the World
Subtraction Stories
Math Fables
Measurement
The Grouchy Lady Bug
Money
26 Letters and 99 Cents
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingGK.htm
277
Author
Eileen Christelow
Ellen Stoll Walsh
Stuart Murphy
Lezlie Evans
P. D. Eastman
Stephen Johnson
Stuart Murphy
Diane Johnston Hamm
Donald Crews
Denise Fleming
Eric Carle
Stuart Murphy
Trudy Harris
Keith Baker
Bernard Most
Margarette Reid
Eric Carle
Greg Tang
Eric Carle
Tana Hoban
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Grade 1 Literature Collection
19 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Numbers to 10
Fish Eyes: A Book You Can Count On
Number Bonds
Anno's Counting Book
Addition Facts to 10
Two Ways to Count to Ten
Subtraction Facts to 10
Ten Sly Piranhas
Shapes and Patterns
Round is a Mooncake
Ordinal Numbers and Position
Henry the Fourth
Numbers to 20
One Moose, Twenty Mice
Addition Facts and Subtraction to 20 Elevator Magic
Length
Inch by Inch
Weight
Mighty Maddie
Picture Graphs and Bar Graphs
Lemonade for Sale
Numbers to 40
Bat Jamboree
Addition Facts and Subtraction to 40 Math-terpieces
Mental Math Strategies
Probably Pistachio
Calendar and Time
Its About Time Max
Numbers to 100
Emily's First 100 Days of School
Addition Facts and Subtraction to
100
Splash
Multiplication and Division
One Is a Snail, Ten Is a Crab
Money
Benny's Pennies
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingG1.htm
278
Author
Lois Ehlert
Mitsumasa Anno
Ruby Dee
William Wise
Roseanne Thong
Stuart Murphy
Clare Beaton
Stuart Murphy
Leo Lioni
Stuart Murphy
Stuart Murphy
Kathi Appelt
Gregg Tang
Stuart Murphy
Kitty Richards
Rosemary Wells
Ann Jonas
April Pulley Sayre
Pat Brisson
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Grade 2 Literature Collection
19 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Numbers to 1,000
12 Ways to Get to 11
Addition to 1,000
Mission: Addition
Subtraction to 1,000
Subtraction Action
Using Bar Models: Addition and
Subtraction
The Best Vacation Ever
Multiplication and Division
A Remainder of One
Multiplication tables of 2, 5, 10
The Best of Times
Metric Measurement of Length
Measuring Penny
Mass
On the Scale, a Weighty Tale
Volume
Pigs in the Pantry
Mental Math Estimation
Betcha!
Money
The Monster Money Book
Fractions
Jump, Kangaroo, Jump
Customary Measurement of Length
How Big is a Foot?
Time
Pigs on a Blanket
Multiplication Tables of 3 and 4
Double the Ducks
Using Bar Models: Multiplication &
Division
The Great Graph Contest
Picture Graphs
From One to One Hundred
Lines and Surfaces
Shapes and Patterns
When a Line Bends a Shape Begins
Picture Pie
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingG2.htm
279
Author
Eve Merriman
Loreen Leedy
Loreen Leedy
Stuart Murphy
Elinor Pinczes
Greg Tang
Loreen Leedy
Brian Cleary
Amy Axelrod
Stuart Murphy
Loreen Leedy
Stuart Murphy
Rolf Myller
Amy Axelrod
Stuart Murphy
Loreen Leedy
Teri Sloat
Rhonda Gowler
Greene
Ed Emberly
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Grade 3 Literature Collection
19 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Numbers to 10,000
The Grapes of Math
Mental Math Estimation
How Many Seeds in a Pumpkin
Addition up to 10,000
Each Orange has Eight Slices
Subtraction up to 10,000
Math for All Seasons
Using Bar Models: Addition and
Subtraction
Mathematickles
Multiplication Tables of 6,7,8,9
One Hundred Hungry Ants
Multiplication
Sir Cumference and All the King's Tens
Division
The Doorbell Rang
Using Bar Models
The Grizzly Gazette
Money
If You Made a Million
Metric Length, Mass and Volume
How Tall, How Short, How Far Away
Real World: Measurement
Millions to Measure
Bar Graph & Line Plots
Cactus Hotel
Fractions
Give Me Half
Customary Length, Weight and
Capacity
Who Sank the Boat?
Time & Temperature
Clocks and More Clocks
Angles & Lines
Hamster Champs
Two-Dimensional Shapes
Shape Up
Perimeter, Area & Volume, A Monster
Area & Perimeter
Book
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingG3.htm
280
Author
Greg Tang
Margaret McNamara
Paul Giganti
Greg Tang
Betsy Franco
Elinor Pinczes
Cindy Neuschwander
Pat Hutchins
Stuart Murphy
David Schwartz
David Adler
David Schwartz
Brenda Guiberson
Stuart Murphy
Pamela Allen
Pat Hutchins
Stuart Murphy
David Adler
David Adler
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Grade 4 Literature Collection
14 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Place Value and Whole Numbers
How Much is a Million?
Estimation and Number Theory
Great Estimations
Whole Number Multiplication &
Division
Anno's Mysterious Multiplying Jar
Tables and Line Graphs
A Fly on the Ceiling
Data and Probability
Do You Want to Bet
Fractions and Mixed-Numbers
Fraction Action
Piece=Part=Portion:
Decimals
Fractions=Decimals=Percent
Adding and Subtracting Decimals
Fractions, Decimals, and Percents
Sir Cumference & the Great Knight of
Angles
Angleland
Perpendicular & Parallel Line
Segments
Pigs on the Ball
Squares and Rectangles
Sam Johnson and the Blue Ribbon Quilt
Area and Perimeter
Spaghetti and Meatballs for All
Symmetry
Math Potatoes
Tessellations
A Cloak for the Dreamer
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingG4.htm
281
Author
David Schwartz
Bruce Goldstone
Mitsumasa Anno
Julie Glass
Jean Cushman
Loreen Leedy
Scott Gifford
David Adler
Cindy Neuschwander
Amy Axelrod
Lisa Campbell Ernst
Marilyn Burns
Greg Tang
Aileen Friedman
Chapter
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Grade 5 Literature Collection
14 Books - Paperback and Hardcover
Topic
Title
Whole Numbers
Can You Count to a Google?
Whole Number Multiplication and
Division
On Beyond a Million
Fractions and Mixed Numbers
Polar Bear Math
Multiplying and Dividing Fractions
The King's Chessboard
Algebra
Anno's Magic Seeds
Area of a Triangle
The Greedy Triangle
Ratio
Counting On Frank
Decimals
Apple Fractions
Percent
If the World Were a Village
Graphs and Probability
If You Hopped Like a Frog
Angles
What's Your Angle, Pythagoras?
Properties of Triangles & Four-sided
Figures
Grandfather Tangs Story
Three-Dimensional Shapes
Sir Cumference and the Sword in the Cone
Surface Area and Volume
Flatland
From http://www.everydayschool.com/Singapore/SingG5.htm
282
Author
Robert Wells
David Schwartz
Ann Whitehead Nagda
David Birch
Mitsumasa Anno
Marilyn Burns
Rod Clement
Jerry Pallotta
David Smith
David Schwartz
Julie Ellis
Ann Tompert
Cindy Neuschwander
Edwin Abbott
Literature Resources for Grades 6-8
Author
Anno, Mitsumasa
Anno, Mitsumasa
Blatner, David
Cooney, Miriam P.
Demi
Duffy, Trent
Field, Robert
Henderson, Harry
Hopkins, Lee Bennett
Hopkinson, Deborah
Juster, Norton
Juster, Norton
Mathis, Sharon Bell
Nagda, Ann Whitehead and
Cindy Bickel
Neuschwander, Cindy
Neuschwander, Cindy
Norton, Mary
Packard, Edward
Pappas, Theoni
Pappas, Theoni
Pappas, Theoni
Paulos, John Allen
Paulos, John Allen
Perl, Teri
Pittman, Helena Clare
Reeves, Diane Lindsey
Reimer, Luetta and Wilbert
Reimer, Luetta and Wilbert
Sachar, Louis
Sachar, Louis
Schimmel, Annemarie
Schmandt-Besserat, Denise
Schwartz, David M.
Scieszka, Jon
Sharman, Lydia
Skurzynski, Gloria
Stein, Sherman K.
Stein, Sherman K.
Tang, Greg
Thompson, Lauren
Wells, Robert E.
Title
Anno's Math Games
Anno's Math Games II
The Joy of Pi
Celebrating Women in Mathematics and Science
One Grain of Rice: A Mathematical Folktale
The Clock
Geometric Patterns from Roman Mosaics: And How to Draw Them
Modern Mathematicians
Marvelous Math: A Book of Poems
Sweet Clara and the Freedom Quilt
The Dot and the Line: A Romance in Lower Mathematics
The Phantom Tollbooth
The Hundred Penny Box
Tiger Math: Learning to Graph from a Baby Tiger
Sir Cumference and the Dragon of Pi: A Math Adventure
Sir Cumference and the First Round Table
The Borrowers
Big Numbers: And Pictures that Show Just How Big They Are!
Fractals, Googols and other Mathematical Tales
Math Talk: Mathematical Ideas in Poems for Two Voices
Mathematical Footprints: Discovering Mathematical Impressions All
Around Us
Innumeracy: Mathematical Illiteracy and its Consequences
Once Upon a Number
Math Equals: Biographies of Women Mathematicians + Related
Activities
A Grain of Rice
Career Ideas for Kids Who Like Math
Mathematicians Are People, Too: Stories from the Lives of Great
Mathematicians, Volume One
Mathematicians Are People, Too: Stories from the Lives of Great
Mathematicians, Volume Two
Sideways Arithmetic from Wayside School
More Sideways Arithmetic from Wayside School
The Mystery of Numbers
The History of Counting
G Is for Googol: A Math Alphabet Book
Math Curse
The Amazing Book of Shapes: Explore Math Through Shapes and
Patterns
On Time: From Seasons to Split Seconds
How the Other Half Thinks
Strength in Numbers: Discovering the Joy and Power of Mathematics
in Everyday Life
The Grapes of Math: Mind-Stretching Math Riddles
One Riddle, One Answer
What's Smaller than a Pygmy Shrew?
283
Appendix D: Flexible Grouping
Within the math classroom, teachers will have a variety of types of learners. These
students will range from those who are extremely comfortable with learning
mathematical concepts and who excel, to those who are extremely reluctant to learn
and use it. Flexible grouping is the most effective instructional strategy for addressing
groups of learners with varying abilities or competencies within the math classroom.
Therefore, flexible grouping should occur on a regular basis throughout the school year.
Students in a flexible group model are assigned to various groups dependent upon their
level of concept development and/or mastery. For example, a child who needs extra
help with counting coins may receive additional practice work on one day, but
enrichment activities during the lesson on telling time, because he has demonstrated
competency in this area. It is the teacher’s responsibility to assess student progress
regularly, through such strategies as observation, anecdotal notes, and status of the
class checklists, to ensure students are receiving appropriate work in their groups.
Flexible grouping strategies may be employed in a variety of structures to assist a
teacher in differentiating instruction for students. Three examples of a “typical flex day”
are included on the following pages.
Option one occurs most regularly within the typical Math in Focus lesson. In this model,
teachers see two groups a day. The class begins as a whole, exploring a math concept
or activity which introduces the focus for the lesson.
Next, Group A students move to a small group for direct instruction and group work with
the teacher. During this time, Group B is assigned independent work that connected to
a previous lesson, and not the scheduled lesson for the day.
After receiving their instruction and participating in the activity for the day, Group A
students leave the teacher’s group to apply their learning in a game, workbook page or
other activity. As Group A is working, they use peers, assistants, and/or the teacher as
a resource as needed. During this time, Group B students receive direct instruction and
participate in a crafted lesson or activity with the teacher.
Group B students then have an opportunity to apply their learning to workbook pages,
games, or other guided practice activities while Group A students work in independent
activities including skill or computational fluency, reflective journaling, games,
enrichment work and math literature. During this time the teacher and any classroom
resource staff are able to act as resources for both groups.
Students who are not seen in Group A or B should be working on independent centers,
games, or other math work. It is important that these “choices” do not require teacher
direction or facilitation. These activities should be previously introduced and developed
as regular routines in order to foster true independence.
284
At the end of the lesson, the teacher rejoins the groups for closure. This component
may be teacher or student-led. See the Flexible Grouping Structure Template in this
section to assist with planning.
Option two and three allow teachers the opportunity to meet with one, two, or several
small groups as students are engaged in station work or problem solving extensions. In
this model, the teacher conferences with select students at one station while others
work in small groups at one of three or four other choices which do not require teacher
direction or facilitation. When a teacher uses observations, anecdotal notes, or other
data instruments to formulate, conference with, and instruct these groups, that teacher
effectively employs flexible grouping. This model may be implemented weekly or
several times per month to afford opportunities for differentiating instruction in a different
setting.
285
Flex Day Option 1 – Math in Focus Lesson
Opening:

Introduce/review a Math in Focus lesson
Small Group/Individual Work:





Explain and model daily tasks
Teacher will pull small groups for re-teaching, extra practice, enrichment,
and conferencing as needed
Various games and activities are used with students not meeting with the
teacher to reinforce Math in Focus skills
Computational fluency is integrated, along with technology resources
Teacher may also use this time for informal assessments
Closing:

Debrief and share learning or problem-solving strategies
286
Flex Day Option 2 – Station Work
Opening:


Homework follow-up
Explanation and modeling of station activities
Rotating Stations:
:







Include varied familiar games and activities with provided directions to
reinforce target concepts
Teacher should pull small groups for re-teaching, enrichment, and
conferencing as needed
Teacher may choose to introduce a new game or exploration/activity and
facilitate this station
Teacher can also use this time for informal assessments
Choice activities, menus, Tic-Tac-Toe boards, etc. may be used as a
student record-keeping option
Activities supporting computational fluencies should be integrated, along
with technology resources
Teacher records anecdotal notes for future reference
Closing:



Debrief activities
Reinforce key concepts
Assign & model homework where appropriate
287
Flex Day Option 3 – Problem-Solving Extensions
Opening:


Warm-up
Review problem-solving objectives
Problem-Solving Options:










Discrete Math Resource
Problem of the Lesson
Monthly Number Story
Exemplars
Open Response Resource
Literature Connection Read-Aloud and Discussion
Technology Activities
Financial Literacy Resource
Teacher can pull small groups for re-teaching, enrichment, and
conferencing as needed
Teacher can also use this time for informal assessments
Closing:


Debrief and share new learning or problem-solving strategies
Assign and model homework where appropriate
288
Flexible Grouping Structure Template
OPENING (5-10)
GROUP A*
GROUP B*
Teaching the Lesson
(10-15)
Independent Work
(10-15)
Guided Practice
(10-15)
Teaching the Lesson
(10-15)
Independent Work
(10-15)
Guided Practice
(10-15)
CLOSURE (5)
*Students who are not seen in Group A or B will be working on :
__________________________
Times are approximate
= whole group
= small flexible group
289
Appendix E: Articles
 NCTM (2010) Statement of Beliefs
 An Algebraic-Habits-of-Mind Perspective on Elementary
School
 From Arithmetic to Algebra
 Best Practice in Mathematics (Chapter 4)
 Techniques for Small Group Discourse
 Snapshots of Student Misunderstandings
290